TW578071B - System and method for allocating the supply of critical material components and manufacturing capacity - Google Patents

System and method for allocating the supply of critical material components and manufacturing capacity Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW578071B
TW578071B TW091101503A TW91101503A TW578071B TW 578071 B TW578071 B TW 578071B TW 091101503 A TW091101503 A TW 091101503A TW 91101503 A TW91101503 A TW 91101503A TW 578071 B TW578071 B TW 578071B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
supply
order
demand
user
item
Prior art date
Application number
TW091101503A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Martin Horne
Original Assignee
Manugistics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Manugistics Inc filed Critical Manugistics Inc
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW578071B publication Critical patent/TW578071B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/06Resources, workflows, human or project management; Enterprise or organisation planning; Enterprise or organisation modelling
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P80/00Climate change mitigation technologies for sector-wide applications
    • Y02P80/40Minimising material used in manufacturing processes
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P90/00Enabling technologies with a potential contribution to greenhouse gas [GHG] emissions mitigation
    • Y02P90/02Total factory control, e.g. smart factories, flexible manufacturing systems [FMS] or integrated manufacturing systems [IMS]

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Human Resources & Organizations (AREA)
  • Economics (AREA)
  • Strategic Management (AREA)
  • Entrepreneurship & Innovation (AREA)
  • Operations Research (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Educational Administration (AREA)
  • Marketing (AREA)
  • Development Economics (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Tourism & Hospitality (AREA)
  • Game Theory and Decision Science (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Factory Administration (AREA)
  • Management, Administration, Business Operations System, And Electronic Commerce (AREA)
  • Complex Calculations (AREA)
  • Collation Of Sheets And Webs (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a system and method for allocating the supply of critical material components and manufacturing capacity by optimizing critical material planning decisions and dynamically allocating constrained materials. The supply allocation system and method support detailed bills-of-material (BOMs) and optimize the use of constrained materials through advanced substitution logic that even considers alternate suppliers and supports the complete product life cycle from design through end-of-life. The supply allocation system and method of the present invention utilize unique synchronized allocations and matched sets logic. The synchronized allocations ensures that all necessary materials for production of a product are available in the appropriate time-phased allocation before beginning production to help ensure that production and materials are not wasted on products that cannot be completed. The supply system may include various combination of components including, a supply planner, a resource optimizer, a constraint based master planner, a product change analyzer, a comparer, a resource requirements planner, a finite resource planner, a customer promiser, and an interactive master scheduler. The core of the simulation process is the supply planner. Other components, such as the resource optimizer and the comparer, then perform their analyses on the output of the supply planner. Another embodiment of the supply system include ""SmartBILL"" substitution to increase responsiveness.

Description

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(!) 有關申請案 本申請案宣稱對2001年1月29曰提出申請之美國臨時申請 案第60/264,321號享有優先權,將該申請案之披露事物以 引用的方式完全併入本文中。 發明領域 在此處所披露的本發明與一種用來配置關鍵物料組件之 供應及製造能力的系統及方法有關。說得更明確些,本發 明與一種用來最佳化在自動化(automated)電子環境中的關 鍵物料組件之供應及製造能力的系統及方法有關。 發明背景 在需要適當材料的場合中卻無法取用它們時,許多公司 就會體驗到製造延誤,較高物料成本,以及低劣客戶服 務。一種基於產品生命週期,客戶特定需要,以及製造計 劃和日程表而最佳化物料規劃和管制的解決方法就是處理 這些問題的關鍵。 面對挑戰之企業雖然具有利用相同關鍵物料組件的諸多 產品,但是卻沒有足夠的那些組件來滿足所有產品需求。 理想的物料資源規劃程式(material resource planner,簡 稱MRP)會容許用戶:利用在最佳產品組合(product mix) 中的那些組件來支援用戶之經營目標。再者,理想的MRP 應該會提供時段化物料可用性以及動態零件/成份 (part/ingredient)替代和配置,以便減少在製品(work-in -process,簡稱WIP)庫存。理想的MRP應該也會使用戶能 夠有效地定位適當物料,以便支援客戶服務和獲利能力 -5- 本紙張尺度適用中圉國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(2 ) (profitability)。理想的MRP應該也會容許用戶:管理和降 低與那些行動有關聯的成本。 然而,不管無法完成訂單之其它零件的短缺情況如何, 諸多已知的MRP都會配置稀缺零件(scarce parts)來履行遠 期訂單。這種方法不必要地使可能使用在使用相同零件之 其它訂單上的存貨處於停滯狀態。此外,傳統的MRP會根 據曰期優先序來配置零件,因而通常不能產生一種會認可 其它優先序或直接支援定期經營目標的計劃。 發明概要 為回應這些和其它需要,一發明提供一種用來配置關鍵 材枓組件之供應及製造能力的系統及方法。本發明之供應 配置系統及方法會最佳化關鍵物料規劃決策以及動態地替 代和配置約束物料。其結果是:隨著增加的服務和市場占 有率(market share)而使週期時間(cycle time)和物料成本 驟降。不像其它物料規劃解決方法,供應配置系統及方法 會支援詳細物料表(B0M)和透過先進替代邏輯來最佳化約 束物料之使用,該替代邏輯會考慮一些替代供應商和支援 從產品設計到壽命終止的完整產品生命週期。為了克服傳 統MRP邏輯的諸多問題和限制,本發明之供應配置系統及 方法會使用唯一同步配置和匹配集合邏輯。 在供應配置系統及方法中,同步配置保證:在開始生產 之前的適當時段化配置中,用來產生一種產品的所有必需 物料都是可用的,以便有助於保證不會將生產和物料都浪 費於無法完成的產品上。具有供應系統及方法,就會橫跨 -6- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(3 多數内部和外部網路而將來自配銷,生產,或客戶訂單的 時基需要(time-based needs)加以集合。用戶能夠平衡針 對生產或目剛供應商承諾(commitments)之約束物料需 要,並且評估替代用之潛在缺料。供應系統及方法會以即 時方式來同時地探究替代和配罝替代手段,並且針對可用 性而透過網際網路來與替代供應商連繫。用戶能夠掃描適 於降低成本機會的採購替代手段和法則,並且將結果決策 自動地納入適當規劃暨企業交易系統中。 藉由:最佳化關鍵物料規劃決策,容許動態物料替代和 配置,以及致能約束物料之更有利使用;本發明進一步容 許用戶:增加客戶服務以及減低採購和催查卜邛以丨如幻成 本。 供應系統可能包括諸多成份的各種組合,該成份包括: 供應規劃程式’資源最佳化程式,基於約束的主規劃程 式,產品變更分析程式,比較器,資源需求規劃程式,有 限資源規劃程式,客戶承諾程式,以及互動式主排程器。 以此方式,供應系統會提供用戶:針對供應鏈(SUpply chain)管理的一種彈性但強效的方法。模擬過程之核心是 供應規劃程式。諸如資源最佳化程式和比較器的其它成 份,隨後會對供應規劃程式之已處理輸出加以執行其分 析。那就是,資源最佳化程式和比較器會將供應計劃行程 (run)的結果當作適於假設性規劃和分析之輸入資料使用。 隨後’諸如資源需求規劃程式和有限資源規劃程式的其它 成份會使用來自供應規劃程式和諸如資源最佳化程式之另 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (!) Relevant Application This application claims priority to US Provisional Application No. 60 / 264,321 filed on January 29, 2001. The disclosure of this application is cited by reference. Ways are fully incorporated into this article. FIELD OF THE INVENTION The invention disclosed herein relates to a system and method for configuring the supply and manufacturing capabilities of critical material components. More specifically, the present invention relates to a system and method for optimizing the supply and manufacturing capabilities of critical material components in an automated electronic environment. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION When appropriate materials are not available, many companies experience manufacturing delays, higher material costs, and poor customer service. A solution to optimize material planning and regulation based on the product life cycle, customer specific needs, and manufacturing plans and schedules is the key to addressing these issues. Challenged companies have many products that utilize the same key material components, but they do not have enough of those components to meet all product requirements. The ideal material resource planner (MRP) will allow users to use those components in the best product mix to support their business goals. Furthermore, the ideal MRP should provide timed material availability and dynamic part / ingredient substitution and configuration in order to reduce work-in-process (WIP) inventory. The ideal MRP should also enable users to effectively locate the appropriate materials in order to support customer service and profitability. -5- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 5 2. Description of the invention (2) (profitability). The ideal MRP should also allow users: manage and reduce the costs associated with those actions. However, regardless of the shortage of other parts that cannot fulfill the order, many known MRPs will be equipped with scarce parts to fulfill future orders. This approach unnecessarily stagnates inventory that may be used on other orders that use the same parts. In addition, traditional MRP allocates parts based on date priorities, so it is often impossible to create a plan that recognizes other priorities or directly supports regular business goals. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In response to these and other needs, an invention provides a system and method for configuring the supply and manufacturing capabilities of critical material components. The supply configuration system and method of the present invention will optimize key material planning decisions and dynamically replace and configure constrained materials. The result: cycle time and material costs plummet with increased service and market share. Unlike other material planning solutions, the supply configuration system and method will support detailed bill of materials (B0M) and use advanced alternative logic to optimize the use of constrained materials. The alternative logic will consider some alternative suppliers and support from product design to End-of-life product life cycle. In order to overcome the many problems and limitations of traditional MRP logic, the provisioning configuration system and method of the present invention uses unique synchronous configuration and matching set logic. In the supply configuration system and method, the synchronous configuration guarantees that all necessary materials used to produce a product are available in an appropriate time period configuration before starting production, so as to help ensure that production and materials are not wasted On products that cannot be completed. With a supply system and method, it will span -6- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Invention description (3 Most internal and external networks will come from distribution Time, based on production, or customer orders are aggregated. Users can balance the constraints on material requirements for production or supplier commitments, and evaluate potential shortages of replacements. Supply systems and The method explores alternatives and matching alternatives in real time, and connects to alternative suppliers through the Internet for availability. Users can scan for alternatives and rules for purchasing opportunities that are suitable for reducing cost opportunities, and translate the results Decisions are automatically incorporated into appropriate planning and corporate transaction systems. By: optimizing key material planning decisions, allowing dynamic material substitution and configuration, and enabling more advantageous use of constrained materials; the invention further allows users to: increase customer service and Reduce procurement and reminders to mitigate costs. Supply systems may include many components. This combination includes: supply planning program 'resource optimization program, constraint-based master planning program, product change analysis program, comparator, resource demand planning program, limited resource planning program, customer commitment program, and interactive master program Scheduler. In this way, the supply system will provide users: a flexible but powerful method for supply chain management. The core of the simulation process is the supply planning program. Resources such as resource optimization programs and comparators The other components then perform their analysis on the processed output of the supply planner. That is, the resource optimizer and comparator will use the results of the supply plan run as inputs suitable for hypothetical planning and analysis. Use of data. Subsequently, other components such as the resource demand planning program and the limited resource planning program will use additional paper from the supply planning program and such as the resource optimization program. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm). )

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(4 ) 一成份的合併結果來產生其它的發現資訊(findings)。 供應系統的其它實施例包括:"SmartBILL”替代能力, 用來增加應變力;同步配置,用來使存貨使用增到最大; 匹配集合邏輯,用來預防不必要的在製品;”Can Build”(限量製造)分析,用來使零件過時減到最少;以及組 態替代手段(configuration alternatives),用來增加客戶 服務。 附圖概述 藉由參考連同諸附圖所採取的下列描述,可能獲得對本 發明及其中諸多優點的更加徹底瞭解;在附圖中,同樣的 參考數字指示同樣的特點,且其中: 圖1A到1D圖解說明··根據本發明的諸多實施例之供應配 置置系統的方塊圖;以及 圖2到9圖解說明:用來繪示在根據本發明的諸多實施例 之圖1A到1D圖的供應配置系統之各種成份的操作中之諸多 步驟的流程圖。 較佳實施例之闡述 本發明提供一種用來配置關鍵物料組件之供應及製造能 力的系統及有關方法。現在參考圖1A到1D,本發明之一觀 點是:一種用來配置關鍵物料組件之供應及製造能力的裝 置(今後,稱之為供應系統100)。在本發明的各種實施例 中,供應系統100通常是一種即時回應系統,它是諸多應用 程式,軟體工具,以及分析能力的集合;該系統使製造商 能夠對可能使其業務存續或中斷的諸多挑戰作出快速又有 -8- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (4) The combined result of one component to generate other findings. Other embodiments of the supply system include: "SmartBILL" replacement capability to increase resilience; synchronous configuration to maximize inventory usage; matching set logic to prevent unnecessary work in progress; "Can Build" (Limited Manufacturing) analysis to minimize obsolete parts; and configuration alternatives to increase customer service. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES By referring to the following description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, it is possible to obtain The invention and its many advantages are more thoroughly understood; in the drawings, the same reference numerals indicate the same features, and among them: Figures 1A to 1D illustrate a block diagram of a supply configuration system according to various embodiments of the present invention And FIGS. 2 to 9 illustrate flowcharts for illustrating various steps in the operation of various components of the supply configuration system of FIGS. 1A to 1D according to various embodiments of the present invention. Explanation of the preferred embodiment The present invention provides a system and related method for configuring the supply and manufacturing capabilities of key material components. Now refer to FIG. 1 A to 1D, one aspect of the present invention is: a device for configuring the supply and manufacturing capabilities of key material components (hereafter referred to as the supply system 100). In various embodiments of the present invention, the supply system 100 is generally A real-time response system that is a collection of applications, software tools, and analytical capabilities; this system enables manufacturers to respond quickly and easily to the many challenges that may make their business last or be interrupted. -8- This paper standard applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

線 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(5 ) 效地回應。供應系統100會提供:滿足這些要求所需的所有 能力。明確地說,供應系統100會支援三種不同觀點:製造 規劃和控制程序-前瞻規劃(proactive planning),反應性 決策(reactive decision making),以及針對特殊專業和製 程改善的分析。藉助於供應系統100,用戶就能夠:對於新 的意外銷售機會以及供應問題作出既快速又準確地回應; 使產能規劃具體化;消除過剩和過時存貨(obsolete inventory);在維持高水準客戶服務的時候減少現用 (active)存貨;對諸多”如果…就怎樣”(what-if)情況作出 即時回應,指導用戶準備好對付:從全局規劃到詳細製造 運作之幾乎是其業務方面的任何變化;以及減少訂單履行 週期時間。 藉由解譯隱匿在用戶主機(host)之製造資源規劃 (Manufacturing Resource Planning,簡稱MRPII)或企業 資源規劃(Enterprise Resource Planning,簡稱ERP)系統 中的資訊,供應系統100能夠幫助用戶解答關鍵性業務問 題。供應系統100會賦予物料,生產,以及採購管理程式 (procurement managers):模擬和分析針對在製造環境中 之任何機會或問題的衝擊之能力。供應系統100會幫助用戶 前瞻性準備好對付:在需求,供應,產品,成本,以及規 劃政策方面的任何變化。供應系統100也會讓用戶將資料加 以切片,切塊,以及過濾而降至製造細目之最低階層。 將供應系統100,用戶10與其它裝置之間的互動繪示於圖 1A和1B中。現在參考圖1A,用戶10可能使用許多已知方 -9- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 __________B7 五、發明說明(6 ) 法來和供應系統100互動。例如,供應系統1〇〇可能是駐存 j計算裝置(未圖示出)上的一種軟體應用程式,用戶10可 月b使用諸如鍵盤或滑鼠之標盤輸入裝置來將資料輸入到該 计算裝置》同樣地,用戶10可能透過視頻監視器或其它類 型的已知輸出裝置加以接收來自供應系統100的輸出資料。 應該察覺到:用戶1G可能使用任何其它類型的已知輸入/輸 出(〗/〇)裝置來和供應系統1〇〇明顯地互動。 如圖1B中所圖解說明的,用戶1〇也可能透過網路3〇,加 乂遠距地存取供應系統1〇〇。明確地說,伺服器2〇可能容許 用戶B :使用已知網路連接組態(netw〇rking c〇nflgurati〇ns),加以遠距地存取供應系統ι〇〇。供應系 、·充100可旎同樣地連接到··諸WMRP 50之遠距應用程式或 遠距資料儲存裝置40。可能從諸如:企業内部網路 (intranets),小型電腦網路(internets),網際網路(化eLine 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (5) Respond effectively. The supply system 100 will provide all the capabilities needed to meet these requirements. Specifically, the supply system 100 supports three different perspectives: manufacturing planning and control procedures-proactive planning, reactive decision making, and analysis for specific specialties and process improvements. With the supply system 100, users can: quickly and accurately respond to new unexpected sales opportunities and supply issues; concrete capacity planning; eliminate excess and obsolete inventory; while maintaining high levels of customer service Reduce active inventory at the right time; respond immediately to many "what-if" situations and guide users to prepare for: almost any change in their business from global planning to detailed manufacturing operations; and Reduce order fulfillment cycle time. By interpreting the information hidden in the Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRPII) or Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system of the user's host, the supply system 100 can help users answer critical business problem. The supply system 100 gives materials, production, and procurement managers the ability to simulate and analyze the impact of any opportunity or problem in the manufacturing environment. The supply system 100 will help users prepare for the future: any changes in demand, supply, products, costs, and planning policies. The supply system 100 also allows users to slice, dice, and filter data to the lowest level of manufacturing detail. The interactions between the supply system 100, the user 10, and other devices are illustrated in Figures 1A and 1B. Now referring to FIG. 1A, the user 10 may use many known parties. 9- This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 __________ B7 5. Invention Description (6) Method to supply and supply 100 interactions. For example, the supply system 100 may be a software application residing on a computing device (not shown), and the user may use a dial input device such as a keyboard or a mouse to input data into the computing Device >> Similarly, the user 10 may receive output data from the supply system 100 through a video monitor or other type of known output device. It should be noticed that the user 1G may use any other type of known input / output (o / o) device to clearly interact with the supply system 100. As illustrated in Figure 1B, the user 10 may also access the supply system 100 remotely via the network 30. Specifically, the server 20 may allow the user B to use a known network connection configuration (netwrking cones) to remotely access the supply system ι〇〇. The supply system can be connected to the WMRP 50 remote application or remote data storage device 40 in the same way. It may be from, for example, intranets, small computer networks (internets),

Internet),以及加值網路(VAN)的許多已知技術中加以選 擇網路30。 仍然是圖1A和1B,供應系統1〇〇會透過分析儲存於儲存 裝置(今後’稱之為資料庫11〇)中的供應有關資料來執行功 能。在本發明的描述中,打算將術語”資料庫"(database)加 以概括定義為:容許電腦程歧位和存取選擇:#料片段所 編組(organized)的任何資訊集合。可能建構資料庫ιι〇的 建立和這種資料的分析;就像在2⑼41〇月29日,由錫卡 (Shekar)等人提出申請,標題為,•用來最佳化資源規劃的系 統及方法之共有美國專利巾請案序號第G9/984,327號中所 •10-Internet), and many known technologies of value-added network (VAN) are selected from network 30. Still in Figures 1A and 1B, the supply system 100 will perform its function by analyzing the supply-related data stored in a storage device (hereafter referred to as a database 11). In the description of the present invention, the term "database" is intended to be broadly defined as: allow computer program dislocation and access selection: any collection of information organized by # 料 段. It is possible to construct a database The establishment of ιι〇 and the analysis of such data; just like on October 29, 41, an application was filed by Shekar et al., entitled, • Common US patents for systems and methods to optimize resource planning Towel Case No. G9 / 984,327

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(7~) ~ 描述的那樣。將資料庫110以及供應系統1〇〇針對資料庫 110的分析更加詳細地描述於下。 儲存於資料庫110中的供應資料(supply data)通常會描 述:打算由供應系統100加以管理之供應品的屬性 (attributes)。明確地說,供應資料包括下列資料包括下列 資,諸如:供應品目前庫存量,供應品庫存預期增加量(諸 如:新增裝運量),以及供應品庫存預期減少量(諸如:在製 作產品中使用供應品)。 利用資料庫11〇中之-標準套裝系統表(system tables)來 設計供應系統100。通常,用戶雖然可能操縱系統表中的資 料’但是卻無法改變資料之結構或内部關係。如圖1A中所 圖解說明的,將資料庫1 1 〇中的諸多系統表以編組成三種主 要的資料類別(categories) ··從主機MRP系統13〇輸入的輸 入資料111 ;由用戶所定義和操縱的用戶定義(user-defined)輸入資料 112 ; 以及因 供應系 統100和由用 戶所執 行之操作所導致的輸出資料113。將每種系統表類型更加詳 細地討論於下。 如圖1C中所繪示的,供應系統100可能與一種已知物料 需求規劃(Material Requirements Planning,簡稱]VIRP) 系統130整合。MRP系統130是一種明確地設計用來處理相 依性需求(dependent demand)庫存項目的生產與存貨規劃 系統。這種MRP系統13 0使企業能夠··降低庫存水準 (inventory levels),善用勞動力和設施,以及改善客戶服 務。特別是,MRP系統130通常會基於母項目(parent hem)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (7 ~) ~ As described. The analysis of the database 110 and the supply system 100 with respect to the database 110 is described in more detail below. The supply data stored in the database 110 usually describes the attributes of the supplies intended to be managed by the supply system 100. Specifically, the supply information includes the following information, such as: the current inventory of supplies, the expected increase in supply inventory (such as: new shipments), and the expected decrease in supply inventory (such as: Use supplies). The supply system 100 is designed using the standard set of system tables in the database 110. Generally, although the user may manipulate the data in the system table, he cannot change the structure or internal relationship of the data. As illustrated in FIG. 1A, many system tables in the database 1 10 are grouped into three main categories. Input materials 111 from the host MRP system 13 are defined by the user and Manipulated user-defined input data 112; and output data 113 due to the provisioning system 100 and operations performed by the user. Each system table type is discussed in more detail below. As shown in FIG. 1C, the supply system 100 may be integrated with a known Material Requirements Planning (VIRP) system 130. The MRP system 130 is a production and inventory planning system specifically designed to handle dependent demand inventory items. This MRP system 130 enables companies to reduce inventory levels, make better use of labor and facilities, and improve customer service. In particular, the MRP system 130 is usually based on the parent hem.

裝 訂Binding

line

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(8578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (8

之生產日程表而提供一種較佳的組件需求預測。系矣 130會進一步提供管理程式:用來估算諸如物料採購之財= 需求的有用資訊。同樣地,當生產日程表因其母項目而= 更時’ MRP糸統13 0就可能會自動地更新相依性需求項目 的補貨(replenishment)曰程表。其中,特別是由baan, PeopleSoft,JDE,SAP,SSA,以及Marcam公司加以生 產諸多已知MRP系統。 如圖1C中所繪示的,供應系統1 〇〇可能接收來自這些外 部系統的資料,進而在產生供應計劃中使用這種輸入資 料。例如,供應系統100可能使用一種應用程式界面 (application protocol interface,簡稱API)40來接收:以 客戶訂單形式呈現的需求資料(demand data)。明確地說, API 40容許供應系統1〇〇接受來自次要訂單管理系統60的 訂單資訊,該系統使客戶服務代表能夠··承接訂單,核對 s丁購項目之可用性(availability),允諾(promise)訂單’以 及承擔(commit)客戶訂單。同樣地,在由供應系統產 生諸多供應計劃之後,供應系統100可能會將它們提供給訂 單管理系統60 ;該系統將會藉由製造,裝運,購買,以及 銷售產品來實際滿足需求。 在一較佳實施例中,在供應系統100中的API 40容許用 戶··存取包含於Oracle®(曱骨文)資料庫中的資料源。API 40容許用戶:利用諸多Oracle最佳化表和攔位來執行規 劃。API 40會從〇racle資料庫中摘取資料,以便和供應系 統100 _起使用。用戶能夠摘取標準資訊集;或者在從The production schedule provides a better component demand forecast. Department 130 will further provide a management program: useful information for estimating such things as material purchases = demand. Similarly, when the production schedule = due to its parent item, the MRP system 130 may automatically update the replenishment schedule of the dependent demand item. Among them, many known MRP systems are produced by baan, PeopleSoft, JDE, SAP, SSA, and Marcam. As depicted in Figure 1C, the supply system 100 may receive data from these external systems and use this input data in generating supply plans. For example, the supply system 100 may use an application protocol interface (API) 40 to receive: demand data in the form of customer orders. Specifically, API 40 allows the supply system 100 to accept order information from the secondary order management system 60, which enables customer service representatives to take orders, check availability of promises, and promises ) Orders' and commit customer orders. Similarly, after many supply plans are generated by the supply system, the supply system 100 may provide them to the order management system 60; the system will actually meet demand by manufacturing, shipping, purchasing, and selling products. In a preferred embodiment, the API 40 in the provisioning system 100 allows users to access data sources contained in an Oracle® database. API 40 allows users to: use a number of Oracle optimization tables and barriers to perform planning. API 40 will extract data from Oracle database for use with supply system 100_. Users can extract standard information sets; or

装 訂Binding

本紙張尺度^財 A4_(2i() -12- 578071 A7Standard paper size A4_ (2i () -12- 578071 A7

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(1〇 ) 面迫使需求(預測)觀點相當於製造(供應來源)觀點。需求整 合工具容許用戶··使用在用戶之供應計劃中的預測資訊。 它會藉著將需求預測單位(Demand Forecasting Units,簡 稱DFUs)映射到存貨保存單位(stockkeeping units,SKUs) 來完成此事。一旦完成此事,供應系統100就能夠使用··供 用戶之物料和生產規劃用的預測資料,因而提供用戶一種 用戶情況之更加完整的描寫。一個存貨保存單位(SKU) 是··用於庫存和生產目的之一項目:並且被定義為:”存在 於一位置處”。一個SKU可能是一種成品(finished g〇〇d), 或者是被製造或儲存之一種成品的組件。它也可能根據組 織之製造程序來加以分類。位置可能是供儲存或製造用的 η際%所’其存在就像工廠或倉庫那樣。相對照下,一個 求預測單位(DFU)是一需求來源,雖然它也是按照項目 和位置加以定義,但是會進一步按照譬如說是:銷售給客 戶的製成零件,表示離散最終銷售或表示帳務和配銷通道 的特定實際場所加以辨別。 同樣地,供應系統100可能和採購系統70互動。使用供應 系統100和採購系統70就會給予買方和供應商:實現在尋源 (sourcing),採購,以及供應零件領域中獲益匪淺的機會。 一種代表性採購系統就是:由本申請案之所有人加以行銷 的NetWORKS Pr〇CUrementTM(網路採購系統)。採購系統 70通常是一種簡單但強效的主從系統(cHent/server system)。基於己經從主機MRP系統輸入的資訊,採購系統 7〇會要求供應商承諾預計需求量。請求(requests)都是以一 -14- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (10) The view of forcing demand (forecast) is equivalent to the view of manufacturing (source of supply). Demand integration tools allow users to use forecast information in their supply plans. It does this by mapping Demand Forecasting Units (DFUs) to stockkeeping units (SKUs). Once this is done, the supply system 100 will be able to use ... materials for the user and forecast data for production planning, thus providing the user with a more complete picture of the user's situation. A stock keeping unit (SKU) is an item used for inventory and production purposes: and is defined as: "existing at a location". A SKU may be a finished product, or a component of a finished product that is manufactured or stored. It may also be classified according to the organization's manufacturing process. A location may be a storehouse or a manufacturing site. It exists like a factory or warehouse. In contrast, a forecasting unit (DFU) is a source of demand. Although it is also defined by project and location, it will be further based on, for example, manufactured parts sold to customers, indicating discrete final sales or accounting And the specific physical location of the distribution channel. As such, the supply system 100 may interact with the procurement system 70. The use of the supply system 100 and the purchase system 70 gives buyers and suppliers: opportunities to realize significant benefits in the areas of sourcing, procurement, and supply of parts. A representative procurement system is: NetWORKS PrOCUrementTM (Internet Procurement System) marketed by the owner of this application. The procurement system 70 is usually a simple but powerful master-slave system (cHent / server system). Based on the information that has been input from the host MRP system, the procurement system 70 will require the supplier to commit to the estimated demand. Requests are based on -14- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7

種會詢問”有人能夠在這些日期,依照這些數量來供應這些 零件嗎?㈣子預測貧訊之形式來發送。採講系統會收 集和分析與預定計劃(Scheduledpr()jeeti()ns)和通融範圍 (flex ranges)有關的所有供應商回應,必要時得報告例外 情形。然後,不論請求是否能夠滿足,採購系統7〇會將所 有供應商回應視為承諾。在例外的情形下,買方能夠使用 採購系統7 0來調整承諾,直到缺料解決為止。 將輸入為料從MRP系統13 0下載(d〇wnioad)到供應輸入 表111中。能夠將輸入資料進一步分成三種類別··參考資料 (reference data)l 11a,供應資料Ulb,以及需求資料 111c。參考11 la包含:當建立和編組系統輸出資訊時,由 供應系統100所使用的參考有關資料及關係。供應資料 11 lb包含:用來表示供應到組織之製造設施的所有物料來 源之供應有關資料。需求資料111c包含:用來表示關於組 織之製造設施和因此關於組織之供應品的需求來源之需求 有關資料。表1摘要了資料類別和儲存輸入資料之對應系統 表: -15- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(12 ) 表1 :系統表(輸入資料) 資料類別 表名稱 參考資料 主項目[IM] 產品結構[PS] 工場曆[SC] 按照成本版本的成本要素[CE] 成本要素費率碼[CER] 庫存[INV] 代表性途程[RR] 工作中心[WC] 主現場[SM] 主項目供應原始現場[IMSRO] 全局供應原始現場[SRO] 供應資料 採購單[PO] 工令單[WO] 申購單[PR] 工令單[WOX](組態) 預測總額[GROSSFO] 裝運[SHP] 浮動[FLOAT] 審查[AUDIT] 現場間供應訂單The species will ask "Can someone supply these parts according to these quantities on these dates? The sister-in-law predicts poor news to send. The acquisition system will collect and analyze and schedule (Scheduledpr () jeeti () ns) and accommodation All supplier responses related to flex ranges, exceptions may be reported if necessary. Then, regardless of whether the request can be satisfied, the procurement system 70 will consider all supplier responses as commitments. In exceptional cases, the buyer can use Purchasing system 70 adjusts the commitment until the shortage is resolved. The input is downloaded from the MRP system 130 (d0wnioad) into the supply input table 111. The input data can be further divided into three categories. data) l 11a, supply data Ulb, and demand data 111c. Reference 11 la includes: when establishing and marshalling system output information, reference related data and relationships used by the supply system 100. Supply data 11 lb contains: used to indicate Supply-related information for all material sources supplied to the organization's manufacturing facilities. Demand information 111c contains: The relevant data of the organization's manufacturing facilities and, therefore, the demand source of the organization's supplies. Table 1 summarizes the data types and the corresponding system tables for storing input data: -15- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (12) Table 1: System table (input data) Data category table name Reference material Main item [IM] Product structure [PS] Factory calendar [SC] According to cost version Cost element [CE] Cost element rate code [CER] Inventory [INV] Representative journey [RR] Work center [WC] Main site [SM] Main project supply original site [IMSRO] Global supply original site [SRO] Supply information Purchase order [PO] work order [WO] purchase order [PR] work order [WOX] (configuration) forecast total [GROSSFO] shipment [SHP] floating [FLOAT] review [AUDIT] inter-site supply order

裝 訂Binding

線 -16-本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(13 ) 需求資料 實際需求量[AR] 實際需求量[ARX](組態) 客戶訂單[CO] 額外使用量獨立性需求[EU] 主排程預測[MS] 現場間需求訂單[ISD] 返回到圖1A,資料庫110可能進一步包括:用來儲存依 照供應系統100所需要之用戶定義資料112的表。例如,三 種用戶定義表是:資源最佳化表(RESO),基於約束的主規 劃表(CMP),以及產品變更分析表(PCA)。一般說來,用 戶透過控制界面和選項來產生將會填滿這些表的資料。兩 者擇一地,用戶可能以手動方式來將記錄插入和編輯到用 戶定義表112中。當執行資源最佳化和產品變更分析操作 時,供應系統100就可能使用用戶定義表112。應該察覺 到:也可能將輸入資料增加到用戶定義表112。例如, RESO表也可能包含輸出資料。 仍然是圖1A,資料庫110進一步包含用來儲存輸出資料 113的表。在供應系統100的操作期間,會產生輸出資料 113,並且將該資料呈現給用戶。明確地說,輸出資料會包 含由供應系統100所產生的結果,並且以一種打算由用戶使 用的方式來呈現結果。這些表中的一些表都是以產生該表 之下列供應系統100的操作名稱來命名:供應規劃,產品變 更分析,資源最佳化,具有基於約束的主規劃之資源最佳 -17- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐)LINE-16- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (13) Demand data Actual demand [AR] Actual demand [ARX] (Configuration ) Customer order [CO] Additional usage independence demand [EU] Main schedule forecast [MS] Inter-site demand order [ISD] Return to FIG. 1A, database 110 may further include: used to store the requirements according to the supply system 100 A table of user-defined information 112. For example, the three user-defined tables are: Resource Optimization Table (RESO), Constraint-Based Master Planning Table (CMP), and Product Change Analysis Table (PCA). In general, users use control interfaces and options to generate data that will fill these tables. Alternatively, the user may manually insert and edit records into the user-defined table 112. The user-defined table 112 may be used by the provisioning system 100 when performing resource optimization and product change analysis operations. You should be aware that it is also possible to add input data to the user-defined table 112. For example, a RESO table may also contain output data. Still in FIG. 1A, the database 110 further includes a table for storing the output data 113. During operation of the provisioning system 100, an output material 113 is generated and presented to the user. Specifically, the output will contain the results produced by the provisioning system 100 and present the results in a manner intended for use by the user. Some of these tables are named after the operation names of the following supply systems 100 that produced the table: supply planning, product change analysis, resource optimization, resource optimization with constraint-based master planning Zhang scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(14 ) 化,資源需求規劃,以及比較。將這些操作更加詳細地描 述於下。下列表2列示了包含輸出資料113的一些表。 表2 :系統表(輸出資料) 操作 表名稱 供應規劃(SP) 聯網[NET] 規劃時段[PER 比較 SP比較[CR] 供應規劃行動 SP 行動[SPA] 產品變更分析(PCA) PCA 結果[PCAR] PCA細目[PCAD] PCA主參數[PCAM] 資源最佳化(RESO) 資源最佳化[RESO] 資源最佳化(w/OBMP) RESO細目[RESOD] 資源需求規劃(RRP) RRP 行動[RRP] RRP規劃時段[RRPPER] 概略細目[RCD] 號碼 號碼[PMI] 績效細目[RMID] 可能將輸出資料113以報表形式呈現給用戶。報表可能根 據:資料庫110中之一完整表,或者關於該表之一選擇資 料。報表通常能夠在線上檢視,將它列印或儲存在檔案 上,以合乎包括開放資料庫連接性(Open Database -18- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (14), resource demand planning, and comparison. These operations are described in more detail below. Table 2 below shows some tables containing output data 113. Table 2: System table (output data) Operation table Name Supply Planning (SP) Networking [NET] Planning Period [PER Compare SP Comparison [CR] Supply Planning Action SP Action [SPA] Product Change Analysis (PCA) PCA Results [PCAR] PCA details [PCAD] PCA main parameters [PCAM] Resource optimization (RESO) Resource optimization [RESO] Resource optimization (w / OBMP) RESO details [RESOD] Resource demand planning (RRP) RRP action [RRP] RRP planning period [RRPPER] Summary breakdown [RCD] Number number [PMI] Performance breakdown [RMID] The output data 113 may be presented to the user in the form of a report. The report may be based on one of the complete tables in database 110, or select data on one of the tables. The report can usually be viewed online, printed or stored on the file to comply with Open Database Connectivity (Open Database -18- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7

Connectivity,簡稱ODBC)和dBASE兩種標準格式加以輸 出。 將其它表定義於表3中: 表3 :供應系統表 表名稱 目 的 實際需求量[AR] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 識別投 依性需求。供1魏將會尋找或建議針 對這些短缺零件的供應。 實際需求量[ARX](已輸 入的組態器輸入資訊) 識別投人in 依性需求。供齡統將會透過組態輸入 特點來尋找鍵議針對這些短缺零件的 供應。 J 審查[AUDIT] (IMS) 杈視預測總額,它少於客戶訂單數 上裝運數目。 校驗[CHKOUT] (内部) 猶由儲存在-伺服器上之供應系統資 料庫所製作的拷貝資訊。只限供應或網 路行政人員使用。 成本要素費率碼[CER] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 儲存用來執行產品結構之基於費率的成 本分組(cost r〇ll-UpS)所需之資料。能夠 使用費率碼來將固定費率或基於百分率 負擔費用料成本。 成本要素[CE] (已輸入的輸入資訊) ^ , 一· " ! . 儲存-種或更多替代零件之成^ (costing)模型或版本資訊,能夠進出主 項目_表中的成本襴位而拷 訊。 ----——--- 本軼張 -19 &度迷用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公爱) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(16 ) 客戶訂單[CO] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 儲存以客戶訂單之形式呈現的獨立性需 求之記錄:什麼(零件)、多少(數量),以 及何時需要(要求日期)。 額外使用量[EU] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 儲存針對諸多項目之獨立性需求的記 錄;該項目一般說來不是終端次數(end_ times)或產品,而是針對維護或備用目 的所需的。 浮動[FLOAT] (IMS) 顯示在浮動表中之未排程訂單的數量。一 全局供應來源[SRO] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 定義針對在多現場合併(multisite consolidation)中之一現場的供應來源。 它容許全局現場定義;並且,若一個其 它現場會供應大多數需求,則它是最有 用的。 預測總額 [GROSSFC1 (IMS) 包含關於依照按月格式之預測量的資 訊。 現場間需求[ISD] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 包含來自所有相關場的轉移訂單。 現場間訂單[ISO] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 包含供應交易資訊,如果已經作出承諾 要滿足一相關現場之需求的話。 庫存[INV] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 儲存與一個以上的現場及/或在一現場内 的諸多儲存器(stores)有關聯的現有零件 庫存量之記錄。用戶能夠將選定個別現 場/儲存器之現有庫存資訊拷貝到主項目 [IM]表或將它去除。是否包括該資訊, 決定於後續供應計劃行程。 項目階層供應來源 [IMSRO](已輸入的 輸入資訊) 定義針對在多現場合併中之一現場的項 目階層供應來源。 -20- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7Connectivity (referred to as ODBC) and dBASE two standard formats for output. The other tables are defined in Table 3: Table 3: Supply System Table Table Name Purpose Actual Demand [AR] (entered input information) Identifies investment-dependent demand. Wei will look for or suggest supplies for these shortages. Actual demand [ARX] (entered configurator input information) Identifies the in-demand requirement of the investment. The supply system will look for the supply of these shortage parts through the configuration input feature. J Review [AUDIT] (IMS) depends on the forecast total, which is less than the number of shipments on customer orders. Check [CHKOUT] (internal) Copy information made by the supply system database stored on-server. For use by supply or network administrators only. Cost element rate code [CER] (entered input information) Stores the data needed to execute the rate-based cost grouping (cost rOll-UpS) of the product structure. Ability to use rate codes to cover fixed or percentage-based expenses. Cost element [CE] (entered input information) ^, a · "!. Store-the type or more of replacement parts ^ (costing) model or version information, can enter and exit the cost item in the main item _ table And torture. ----——--- Ben Yi Zhang-19 & Du Fan uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 public love) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (16) Customer order [CO] (entered Input information) Stores a record of independence requirements in the form of customer orders: what (parts), how much (quantities), and when they are needed (date required). Extra usage [EU] (entered input information) Stores a record of the independence requirements for many items; this item is generally not an end_time or product, but is needed for maintenance or backup purposes. Floating [FLOAT] (IMS) Displays the number of unscheduled orders in a floating table. -Global Source of Supply [SRO] (entered input information) Defines the source of supply for one site in multisite consolidation. It allows global site definition; and it is most useful if one site will supply most of the demand. Forecast Gross [GROSSFC1 (IMS) contains information on forecast volumes in a monthly format. Inter-Site Requirements [ISD] (input information entered) Contains transfer orders from all relevant sites. Inter-Site Order [ISO] (input information entered) contains supply transaction information, if a commitment has been made to meet the needs of a relevant site. Inventory [INV] (entered input information) Stores a record of the inventory of existing parts associated with more than one site and / or many stores in a site. The user can copy or remove existing inventory information for the selected individual site / storage to the master item [IM] sheet. Whether or not to include this information depends on the subsequent supply plan itinerary. Project-level supply source [IMSRO] (input information entered) Defines the project-level supply source for one site in a multi-site consolidation. -20- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7

主項目[IM] ' (已輸入的輸入資訊) ~~------ 儲存關於用戶零件(料號和說明),現有 庫存,訂購政策等等之供應系統需要的 主排程[IMS] (已輸入的輸入資訊)_ 聯網[NET]*可由用戶$ 的(輸入資訊) PCA 主參數[PCAD] ~ (用戶輸入資訊) 儲存獨立性需求預測的記錄。 ---—---- ,存由一個供應計劃所產生的行動,只 疋將匕作為數值指標(numehcal pointers) 〇 鍺存針對所有產品變更的輸入資訊細 目。它也被用來設置針對變更操作的指 標。 PCA主參數[PCA] (用戶輸入資訊) 健存主產品變更分析輸入參數 (parameters)。主輸入參數均指向特定產 品變更分析細目記錄。 PCA結果[PCAR] (輸出資訊) 保存供應糸統產品變更分析的結果。 績效細目[PMID] (輸出資訊) 保存一供應系統之稱為”The Numbers”的 自動化規劃績效衡量實用程式(utility)之 結果。 規劃時段[PER] (輸出資訊) 餘存用來定義用戶規劃時段(periods)[英 文也稱為buckets]之結構的資料,並且由 供應系統所使用。 產品結構[PS] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 保存用來描述組成用戶之產品的諸多零 件之間的關係之資料。 採購單[PO] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 儲存零件供應之記錄作為採購單或預定 接收量。 申購單[PR] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 老用戶之規劃需要考量PR成為預定接收 量,則儲存零件供應之記錄作為申購 單。Main item [IM] '(entered input information) ~~ ------ Main schedule required by the supply system for storing user parts (part number and description), existing inventory, ordering policy, etc. [IMS] (Entered input information) _ Network [NET] * (input information) PCA main parameters [PCAD] ~ (user input information) of user $ Stores the records of independent demand forecasts. ---------, save actions generated by a supply plan, and only use daggers as numehcal pointers 〇 Germanium stores input details for all product changes. It is also used to set indicators for change operations. PCA main parameters [PCA] (User input information) Save the main product change analysis input parameters (parameters). The main input parameters all point to a detailed product change analysis detail record. PCA result [PCAR] (output information) The result of the change analysis of the supply system product is saved. Performance Details [PMID] (Output Information) The results of an automated planning performance measurement utility called "The Numbers" of a supply system are stored. Planning period [PER] (output information) The remaining data used to define the structure of the user's planning periods (also called buckets in English) and is used by the supply system. Product Structure [PS] (entered input information) Holds data used to describe the relationship between the many parts that make up the user's product. Purchase Order [PO] (entered input information) Stores a record of the supply of parts as a purchase order or a scheduled receipt. Purchase order [PR] (entered input information) For planning of old users, it is necessary to consider that PR becomes the scheduled receipt amount, and then store the record of parts supply as a purchase order.

裝 訂Binding

線 -21 -本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(18 ) 代表性途程[RR] (已輸入的輸入資訊) 儲存針對每個項目的負載標準資訊 且將該資訊使用在資源需求規劃操作 中。 RESO {RES0} (輸出資訊) 保存輸入資訊以及供應系統之資源最佳 化細目操作的摘要階層(summary_level) 結果。 RES0細目[RES0D] (輸出資訊) 保存一個資源最佳化行程的詳細說明。 概略細目[ROD] (輸出資訊) 儲存來自資源需求規劃操作之已計算負 載細目結果,只是將它作為數值指標。 RRP 行動[RRP] (輸出資訊) RRP行動表會儲存RRP結果;那就是, 該行動都是由一個RRP行程所產生,並 且將它轉換成一種可讀取形式。 裝運細目tSHIPJ 包含關於依照每日格式之裝運量的資 訊。 仍然是圖1A ’用戶可能使用一種產品屬性定義工具12〇 來產生供應資料於資料庫11〇中。工具12〇通常會協助用戶 定義:有興趣之商品,該商品之目前庫存水準,以及影響 商品庫存水準之各種程序(諸如:獲得,製作或使用商品)。 例如’用戶可能使用已知MRp來定義商品及有關程序。同 樣地,用戶可能使用一種已知資料庫程式規劃語言,諸 如· Oracle SQL(結構化查詢語言)。 在本發明之一實施例中,產品屬性定義工具12〇是一種產 口口屬性語言(Product Attribute Language,簡稱PAL)。 PAL ’就像在由本發明之所有人加以行銷的Netw〇rks SupplyTM(網路供應系統)中具體實施的那樣,它是一種用 -22- 本紙張尺度適財S g家標準(CNS) Μ規格(训χ 297公爱) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(19 ) 來建立諸多可組態組裝品(configurable assemblies)之模 型的專屬語言。一種包含替代規則的平面檔案(flat file)是 利用PAL編譯器加以編譯,以便產生可組態組裝品的供給 模型(provisioning model)。PAL模型之重要概念是··定 義在各種零件之間的消費者/供給者(consumer/provider) 關係。零件都被定義為:資源源的消費者及/或供給者。資 源平衡會保證:維持諸多定義關係。可能將資源想像成: 由零件消耗或供應的有形或無形目標(intangible objects)。使用PAL來載明用戶可能輸入的資訊,以便選 擇:產品特點,組態一種產品所需的計算,以及製造具有 用戶載明特點之產品所需的物料表。 PAL是一種用來發展產品屬性稽案的平台(platform)和不 受產品影響的(product-independent)工具,並且將它描述 如下:PAL平面檔案是利用任何本文編輯器(text editor)或 文字處理器(word processor)書寫的;它與硬體無關;使 用標準ASCII(美國資訊交換標準碼)字元集,IEEE(電機電 子工程師學會)64位元浮點數字:能夠容易地定義諸多用戶 界面,因而容許任意的簡單或詳細程度,就像適合於用戶 意見聽取(user audience)那樣;支援同時供給設備的諸多 有關物件;支援供給增添物(已經安裝之產品的附加物(addons)) ; 以及將 零件定 義為資源的消 費者及/或供 給者。 將一 PAL原始檔案分成諸多區段。每個區段都由命名區 段的文字開始,並且包含一種類型資訊。這些區段都是按 照一種特定順序出現。原始檔案包括:模型區段(model -23 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐)Line-21-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (18) Representative process [RR] (entered input information) Load standard information and use that information in resource demand planning operations. RESO {RES0} (output information) A summary level (summary_level) result that stores input information and resource optimization details of the supply system. RES0 item [RES0D] (output information) Save a detailed description of the resource optimization schedule. Summary Item [ROD] (Output Information) Stores the calculated load item result from the resource demand planning operation, but uses it as a numerical indicator. RRP action [RRP] (output information) The RRP action table stores the RRP results; that is, the action is generated by an RRP trip and converted into a readable form. The shipping item tSHIPJ contains information on the shipment volume in the daily format. Still FIG. 1A ′ The user may use a product attribute definition tool 12o to generate supply data in the database 11o. Tool 120 will usually assist users in defining: the product of interest, the current inventory level of the product, and various procedures that affect the inventory level of the product (such as: obtaining, making, or using the product). For example, a user may use known MRp to define goods and related procedures. Similarly, users may use a known database programming language such as Oracle SQL (Structured Query Language). In one embodiment of the present invention, the product attribute definition tool 120 is a Product Attribute Language (PAL). PAL 'is implemented in the Netwrks SupplyTM (Internet Supply System) marketed by the owner of the present invention, it is a -22-standard paper standard (CNS) M specification (Teaching χ 297 public love) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (19) To build the exclusive language of many models of configurable assemblies. One type of flat file containing replacement rules is compiled with a PAL compiler to produce a provisioning model of a configurable assembly. The important concept of the PAL model is to define the consumer / provider relationship between various parts. Parts are defined as consumers and / or suppliers of sources. Resource balance will ensure that many defined relationships are maintained. Think of resources as: Tangible objects that are consumed or supplied by parts. Use PAL to specify the information the user may enter for selection: product characteristics, calculations required to configure a product, and bill of materials required to make a product with the user-specified characteristics. PAL is a platform and product-independent tool for developing product attribute audits, and it is described as follows: PAL flat files use any text editor or word processing Written by a word processor; it has nothing to do with hardware; uses standard ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) character set, IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 64-bit floating-point numbers: can easily define many user interfaces , Thus allowing an arbitrary level of simplicity or detail, just as it is suitable for user audiences; support for many related objects that supply equipment at the same time; support for supply of add-ons (addons of installed products); and Define parts as consumers and / or suppliers of resources. Divide a PAL source file into sections. Each section starts with the text of the named section and contains a type of information. These sections all appear in a specific order. The original file includes: model section (model -23-this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 「_ ) section),該區段包含用來描述產品屬性的識別資訊。原始 檔案進一步包括一些表,該表都是用來··查閱無法計管的 數值;獲得計算太過複雜或費時的數值;或者定義針對— 表的尺寸和數值。原檔案之另一成份是:結構區段 (structure section),該區段會列表設備的諸多高階物件 (high level pieces),一般說來都是由產品屬性所表示的產 品。若沒有結構資訊列表,則PAL會假定:在變數 (variable)和供給(provisi〇n)兩個區段中的所有資訊都是 相同結構的一部份。若結構區段包含任何資訊,則將變$ 和供給資訊分配給特定結構。變數區段會定義:有關變數 打算怎樣呈現給用戶,以及變數打算怎樣計算。執行區段 (execution secti〇n)會控制:以各種方式計算的諸多變數 之計算。使供給區段計算出每一特定項目中有多少項目需 I被組態的最佳方式是··使用⑽的資源平衡特點。這樣 做,用戶會產生資源區段(res〇urce secti〇n),該區段包 含:可能由供給登載項(entlT)所消耗和供給的資源列表。 *於資源會定義兩個可組態項目之間的關係,故而可能將 $些資源識別為:用來執行設備的兩個物件之間的分配盘 互連的資源。 μ -組產品屬性能夠包含針對幾種產品的組態資訊。此區 段被用來庫明:諸多產品的名稱,以及它們相互間的關 m許將產品屬性分成諸多片段,不是在像_種模式 的各種區段被分成諸多語意有關片段(semantically-reUted p說S)那樣的語法層次(別加丨㈣丨)處而是分 I___ _24- 本纸張尺度適用中國圃家標準(CNS) A4規^----578071 A7 B7 “_” section), this section contains identification information used to describe product attributes. The original file further includes tables that are used to ··············· ······································································ Values which cannot be calculated; Time-consuming values; or definitions—the size and value of the table. Another component of the original file is the structure section, which lists many high-level pieces of equipment. Generally speaking, Is a product represented by product attributes. If there is no structured information list, PAL assumes that all information in both the variable and supply sections is part of the same structure. If The structure section contains any information, and the variable $ and supply information are assigned to a specific structure. The variable section defines: how the variable is intended to be presented to the user, and how the variable is intended to be calculated. The execution section (execution sectión) controls : The calculation of many variables calculated in various ways. The best way to make the supply section calculate how many items in each particular item need to be configured is ... The characteristics of resource balance. In doing so, the user will generate a resource section (resorce secti0n), which contains: a list of resources that may be consumed and supplied by the provision entry (entlT). * The resource will define two The relationship between two configurable items, so some resources may be identified as: resources used to perform the disk interconnection between the two objects used to perform the device. Μ-group product attributes can contain groups for several products This section is used to clarify: the names of many products and their relationship to each other. The product attributes are divided into many fragments, not in various sections of the _ mode are divided into many semantically relevant fragments. -reUted p said S) The grammatical level (don't add 丨 ㈣ 丨) is divided into I___ _24- This paper standard is applicable to China Garden Standard (CNS) A4 ^^

成與高階設備之一特定物件有關的諸多片段。 旦已經定義結構表,就能夠使在變數和供給兩個區段 中的登載項與-個或更多結構有關聯。载明結構會容許產 品屬性執行環境:以一種更合乎邏輯的產品導向(product_ oriented)方式來將資訊呈現給用彳·,並且更快速地執行, 因為它能夠忽略PAL原始檔案的諸多部份,該部份都不是 用戶正在組態之一產品的那部份。 一般說來,—個組裝品(assemMy)是由許多不是零件就 是裝配件(assemblies)的子組件(sub-c〇mp〇nents)所組 成。組裝品也可能是由提供相同功能性的諸多替代零件或 裝配件的-種組合所組成。能夠使用諸多pAL模式來表示 :個組裝品的各種可能組合。譬如說,若組裝品錄然最初 是由-個零件B和-個零件c組成,但是也能夠由—個零件 D和2個單位的零件B所製成。以下是—替換性組態的另一 實例,其^中··零件C原先是由零件A和零件B所組成。在一 替換性組態中,零件c是由兩種零件1)和;6的組合所構築, 其中的約束是··零件D的數量是零件A之原始數量的3〇%。 若需求100個單位的C零件,則應該會產生1〇〇個單位的八和 B零件的-種分解式需求(expl〇ded demand),其中·分解 式需求描述獲得一種期望商品所需的諸多構成零件和資 源。若使用替換性組態而需求1〇〇個單位的c零件,則應該 會需求30個單位的〇零件和1〇〇個單位的8零件的一種分解 通用PAL模型建立約束可能包括:⑴在pAL模型中所供 __-25- 本纸張尺度適种S S家料(CNS) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(22 ) 給的可組態組裝品應該包含一種定義於產品結構表中的產 品結構;(2)應該將諸多可替代零件列示於IM表中;(3)可 替代零件通常都是採購零件;(4)若組裝品被定義為可組態 零件,則針對主要子組件的前置時間(lead time)必須大於 〇 ; (5)為了使一可替代零件存在於組態組裝品中,就必須 建立適當的消費者/供給者關係;以及(6)針對一可組態組裝 品的PAL模型會考量存在於原始物料表(BOM)中的所有可 替代子組件,使得BOM中的子組件和在PAL模型中所識別 的子組件一起使用,以便有助於保證:準確數量及/或零件 存在於最終組裝品中。 物料表(BOM)是投入一種母組裝品(parent assembly)中 之所有子裝配件(subassemblies),中間零件及原料(raw materials)的列表,因而顯示出製作一個組裝品所需之每個 組件的數量。將它和主生產日程表(Master Production Schedule) —起使用,以便確定:申購單(purchase requisitions)和生產訂單必須釋放的項目。例如,縮行式 (indented)物料表之報表會提供產品結構的多階觀點(multi level view)。這種報表會將最高階層的母組裝品展現在最 接近左邊限處,並且將投入這些母組裝品中的所有組件都 向右縮一行來顯示。將所有後續階層的組件再進一步向右 縮一行。若在一既定產品結構内,一組件被使用於一個以 上的母組裝品中;則該組件會在使用了它的每種子裝配件 之下出現不只一次。 PAL或其它產品屬性可能被用戶使用來定義:打算由供 -26- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(23 ) 應系統100加以分析之供應資料的許多特點。例如,用戶可 能將訂單定義為逾期(pastdue)。當訂單逾期時,就可能以 不同的方式來處理它。若供應系統100確定訂單逾期,則逾 期訂單可能仍然須經重新排程(rescheduling)。明確地說, 可能處理逾期訂單,好像它今天到期似的(開始日期)。兩者 擇一地,不管日期如何,供應系統100都可能聯網(net)訂 單。 同樣地,用戶也可能選擇從重新排程邏輯中除去一訂 單。用戶也可能從供應系統100中除去某些組件之零件。有 許多用戶可能選擇除去任何訂單或一組件的理由。譬如 說:若供應系統100無法在某一日期以前確認來自供應商的 訂單交貨,或者,若製造機器因維修而停機;則可能除去 訂單。 兩者擇一地,用戶或供應系統100可能藉由使訂單成為” 確定"(firm)而防止訂單之重新排程。這項行動也可能指稱 為’’床結"(freezing)—訂單。當訂單為確定時,訂單之數量 就不能增加或減少,也不能取消該訂單。當用戶使訂單成 為確定時,供應系統100不會嘗試重新排定訂單,供應系統 100也不會重新排定針對相同零件的任何後續訂單,該後續 訂單都是比確定訂單之到期日(due data)還要早。若將一訂 單重新排定為”上拉"(pull);則只將它上拉到針對相同零件 之一確定訂單的曰期,如果有的話。當有針對一零件的不 滿足需求時,就會產生計劃供應訂單(planned supply order,簡稱PSO),諸多新訂單的建議排程則都是始於針對 -27- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)Into many pieces related to a specific object of a high-end device. Once the structure table has been defined, the entries in the variables and supply sections can be associated with one or more structures. The stated structure will allow the product attribute execution environment: to present information to users in a more logical product_oriented way, and to execute it faster because it can ignore many parts of the PAL original file, This part is not the part of the product that the user is configuring. Generally speaking, an assembly (assemMy) is composed of many sub-components that are either parts or assemblies. An assembly may also consist of a combination of many replacement parts or assemblies that provide the same functionality. A number of pAL modes can be used to represent the various possible combinations of an assembly. For example, if the assembled product is initially composed of one component B and one component c, it can also be made of one component D and two units of component B. The following is another example of an alternative configuration, in which: Part C was originally composed of Part A and Part B. In an alternative configuration, part c is constructed from a combination of two parts 1) and 6; the constraint is that the number of parts D is 30% of the original number of parts A. If 100 units of C parts are required, 100 units of eight and B parts should generate an exponential demand. Among them, the expansive demand describes the number of items required to obtain a desired product. Make up parts and resources. If the replacement configuration requires 100 units of c parts, a decomposition of the general PAL model that would require 30 units of 0 parts and 100 units of 8 parts may include: Provided in the pAL model __- 25- This paper is suitable for SS household materials (CNS) 578071 A7 B7 V. Invention description (22) The configurable assembly should include a product defined in the product structure table Structure; (2) many replaceable parts should be listed in the IM form; (3) replaceable parts are usually purchased parts; (4) if the assembly is defined as a configurable part, the The lead time must be greater than 0; (5) in order for a replaceable part to exist in the configuration assembly, an appropriate consumer / supplier relationship must be established; and (6) for a configurable assembly The PAL model of the product considers all substitutable sub-components that exist in the original bill of materials (BOM), so that the sub-components in the BOM and the sub-components identified in the PAL model are used together to help ensure: / Or parts are present in the final assembly . The bill of materials (BOM) is a list of all subassemblies, intermediate parts, and raw materials put into a parent assembly, thus showing each component required to make an assembly Quantity. Use it with the Master Production Schedule to determine: purchase requisitions and items that the production order must release. For example, a report on an indented bill of materials will provide a multi-level view of the product structure. This report will show the highest-level parent assemblies as close to the left margin, and all the components put into these parent assemblies will be shown one row to the right. Shrink all further components down one row to the right. If a component is used in more than one parent assembly within a given product structure, the component will appear more than once under each subassembly that uses it. PAL or other product attributes may be used by the user to define: intended to be used by -26- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (23) Should be applied by the system 100 Analysis of many characteristics of supply data. For example, a user might define an order as pastdue. When an order is overdue, it may be handled differently. If the supply system 100 determines that the order is overdue, the overdue order may still have to be rescheduled. To be clear, it is possible to process an overdue order as if it were due today (start date). Alternatively, regardless of the date, the supply system 100 may net order. Similarly, the user may choose to remove an order from the rescheduling logic. The user may also remove parts of certain components from the supply system 100. There are many reasons why users may choose to remove any order or a component. For example, if the supply system 100 cannot confirm the delivery of an order from a supplier by a certain date, or if the manufacturing machine is down for maintenance, the order may be removed. Alternatively, the user or the supply system 100 may prevent reordering of the order by making the order "firm". This action may also be referred to as "freezing"-order When the order is confirmed, the number of orders cannot be increased or decreased, and the order cannot be cancelled. When the user makes the order confirmed, the supply system 100 will not attempt to reschedule the order, and the supply system 100 will not be rescheduled For any subsequent orders for the same part, the subsequent order is earlier than the due data of the order. If an order is rescheduled as "pull up" (pull); Pull to the date, if any, of the order for one of the same parts. When there is unsatisfactory demand for a part, a planned supply order (PSO) will be generated. The recommended schedule for many new orders starts with -27- This paper size applies Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

線 五、發明説明(24 ) 該零件之最後確定訂單的到期日。同樣地,若將一訂單重 新排定為’’下推”(push);則它絕對不會比針對相同零件之 一確定訂單的曰期還要晚。兩者擇一地,藉由設定針對上 拉,下推,以及取消的時間籬(time fences)於相同對話 (dialog box)中;就能夠達成彈性確定操作(flexiMe firming)。 在供應系統10 0内的替代特點容許用戶:在主要組件 (primary component)之可用性不足和獲得該組件之前置時 間不足的場合,排定在組裝品中的替代組件。有三種方法 可能被替代邏輯加以應用:允許替代法(permissive),用盡 為止替代法(use-until-exhaust),以及可組態替代法 (configurable)。允許替代法允許··當顧慮到轉移前置時間 時,打算以預定替代零件以及在原始現場(s〇urce site)處 採購的轉移零件(transfer part)來替換不可用主零件(prime part)。繼供應規劃階段之後就發生替代操作。用戶能夠設 定允許替代法,以便部份地屨行需求。用盡為止替代法允 許·在主零件供應己經用盡之後,打算以預定替代零件來 替換不可用主零件。與允許替代法相對照,在供應規劃階 段期間會發生用盡為止替代操作,並且將替代零件用於所 有未來需求。可組態替代法使得:當必須訂購一特定組裝 品,並且有諸多替代方式來製造它時,打算使用諸多更複 雜微妙的組態法則來確定做什麼是有可能的。在執行供應 規劃程式200之後和啟動資源最佳化程式3 〇〇之前的一個階 段,通常會從供應系統1〇〇中加以建構這種類型的替代操 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(25 ) 作,將該操作描述於下。 為了確定替代操作是否會在一前置時間内發生,供應系 統100會基於在一前置時間外的所有預定接收量(scheduled receipts)都被上拉到前置時間的假定而計算出··主零件和 替代零件兩者的超額供應量(excess supply)。若供應量足 以更新需求之主零件資訊的工作是由主零件所屨行,且若 供應Ϊ不足,則供應系統1 0 0隨後會針對一主零件而驗證在 前置時間内的可用承話(Available_To-Promise,簡稱 A T P)。並且,供應系統1 〇 〇會驗證·在聯網在前置時間或 外的需求之刖,屢行了在前置時間外的所有需求。 為了執行在前置時間内之一替代操作,供應系統1〇〇會使 用··在針對主零件之需求日期時具有足夠供應量的預定替 代零件。藉由使用在前置時間曰期時具有足夠供應量的預 定替代零件,而由替代零件來屨行需求。需求是由替代零 件所屨行,並且供應系統100會啟動針對主零件的計劃供應 訂單(PSO)。同樣地,為了確定替代操作是否會在前置時『: 時或外發生,供應系統100會核對在前置時間外的需求是否 能夠利用主零件來屨行。若是肯定的,則供應系統10^使 用主零件來屨行需求。若在屨行需求之後會有超額主愛件 存在,則供應系統100會將這些零件當作在其它需求中^可 能替代零件加以配置。若主零件無法滿足需求,則供 統繼會執行替代操作。在執行在前置時間時或外㈣S 2,供應系統⑽會使用··在所有它自己的需求都己經被 仃之後具有超額供應量的預定替代零件。若替代操作不 -29 - 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(26 )Line V. Description of Invention (24) The final date of the order is determined for the part. Similarly, if an order is rescheduled as "push"; it will never be later than the date of the order for one of the same parts. Alternatively, by setting the Pull-up, push-down, and canceled time fences are in the same dialog box; flexiMe firming can be achieved. Alternative features in the supply system 100 allow users: in the main component (primary component) Insufficient availability and inadequate time before obtaining the component, the replacement component is scheduled in the assembly. There are three methods that may be applied by the substitution logic: Permissive method (permissive), replacement until exhaustion Method (use-until-exhaust), and configurable substitution method. Allowed substitution method allows ... When the transfer lead time is taken into consideration, it is intended to replace the part with a predetermined and at the original site (sour site) Purchased transfer parts to replace unavailable prime parts. Subsequent operations occur after the supply planning phase. Users can set allowable substitution methods, The demand will be partially fulfilled. The replacement method allows until the exhaustion of the main part supply. It is intended to replace the unavailable main part with a predetermined replacement part. In contrast to the allowable replacement method, it occurs during the supply planning phase. Replace operations until they are exhausted, and use replacement parts for all future needs. Configurable substitution methods make it possible to use many more complex and subtle configurations when a specific assembly must be ordered and there are many alternative ways to make it Rules to determine what is possible. A stage after the supply planning program 200 is executed and before the resource optimization program 300 is started, this type of alternative operation is usually constructed from the supply system 100. A7 B7 5. Invention description (25) operation, the operation is described below. In order to determine whether the replacement operation will occur within a lead time, the supply system 100 will be based on all scheduled receipts outside the lead time. receipts) are calculated by the assumption that the lead time is pulled up to the front. · The excess supply of both the main part and the replacement part (exce ss supply). If the supply is sufficient to update the demand for the main part information, the main part performs the task, and if the supply is insufficient, the supply system 100 will then verify the lead time for a main part. Available_To-Promise (ATP for short). In addition, the supply system 100 will verify that when the network is in the lead time or out of demand, all the requirements outside the lead time are repeated. In order to execute in One of the replacement operations within the lead time, the supply system 100 will use a predetermined replacement part that has a sufficient supply at the demand date for the main part. Demand is met by the replacement part by using a predetermined replacement part with sufficient supply at the lead time date. Demand is performed by replacement parts, and the supply system 100 initiates a planned supply order (PSO) for the main part. Similarly, in order to determine whether the replacement operation will occur before or after the lead time, the supply system 100 checks whether the demand outside the lead time can be performed using the main part. If it is affirmative, the supply system 10 ^ uses the main part to carry out the demand. If there is an excess of favorite parts after the demand is met, the supply system 100 will treat these parts as other parts, and may configure them. If the main part fails to meet the demand, supply and supply will perform an alternative operation. When executed in lead time or outside (S 2), the supply system will not use ... a predetermined replacement part with an excess supply after all its own needs have been processed. If the replacement operation is not -29-578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (26)

疋切實可行的,則供應系統1〇〇會規劃 τ對主零件的ρς〇。 應該執行供應和需求之需求量的分知7竹’以確定是否堂 替代操作。若需要替代操作,則也需要 要 頂疋替代零件的公 析,以4定其需求*。只有在替代零件具有超過它自已 需求量之超額供應量時,才會發生替代操作。兩者擇2 地,允許替代法容許不可用轉移零件:打算以在原始現= 處採購的(諸多)需件加以替換;而轉移替代操作則說明轉移 前置時間(transfer lead time)。通常,當替代零件是主要 零件,並且是在與主要零件相同的現場處時,就沒有轉移 前置時間;但是當替代零件是主要零件,並且是在不同現 場處時,就會有轉移前置時間。 在另一建構例中,供應系統100容許用戶定義幻象骏配件 (phantom assemblies),它們都是在製造程序期間通常會 被消耗的零件,因此通常不會當作分離實體加以庫存。告 供應系統100遭遇幻象零件時,就會將需求傳遞到下一階= 的組件,並且不會產生計劃供應訂單。通常,若現有4 (on-hand quantity)存在,或者若有任何預定接收量;則幻 象零件只會出現在供應系統100輸出資訊中。若在諸如:客 戶訂單(C〇),主日程表(^!5),額外使用量(extra USage, 簡稱EU),或者安全存量(SAF)之一表中指出有獨立性需长 (independent demand),則只會規劃幻象零件。若幻象愛 件具有設定安全存量,則只有在可用庫存量(即:現有量加 上在供應系統100之前的預定接收量)小於針對幻象零件之 安全存量的全部數量時,供應系統100才會建議一種安全存 -30- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)疋 If it is practicable, the supply system 100 will plan τ for main parts. A knowledge of supply and demand needs should be performed to determine whether to substitute operations. If replacement operations are required, analysis of replacement parts is also required to determine their needs *. The replacement operation will only occur if the replacement part has an excess supply that exceeds its own demand. Alternatively, the allowable substitution method allows unavailable transfer parts: intended to be replaced by the (many) required parts purchased at the original place; and the transfer replacement operation indicates the transfer lead time. Generally, there is no transfer lead time when the replacement part is the main part and it is at the same site as the main part; but when the replacement part is the main part and it is at a different site, there is a transfer lead time time. In another embodiment, the supply system 100 allows the user to define phantom assemblies, which are parts that are typically consumed during the manufacturing process and therefore are not usually stocked as separate entities. When the supply system 100 encounters a phantom part, the demand is passed to the next-order component and no planned supply order is generated. Generally, if an existing 4 (on-hand quantity) exists, or if there is any predetermined receipt quantity, the phantom part will only appear in the output information of the supply system 100. If one of the tables such as: customer order (C0), main schedule (^! 5), extra USage (EU), or SAF indicates that there is an independent demand ), Only phantom parts are planned. If the phantom love piece has a set safety stock, the supply system 100 will only recommend if the available inventory (ie, the existing amount plus the pre-received amount before the supply system 100) is less than the total amount of safety stock for the phantom part A safe deposit -30- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裴 訂Bae Order

綠 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(27 ) 量替換單。幻象零件都被用來合乎邏輯地平整(flMten)物 料表。當製造商正在經營工令單較少工作場所(w〇rk_ order-less shop floor)時,就會完成此事;因而只是使用 供應系統100來規劃採購零件。 視情況地 用尸1此產生針對母組裝品/組件關係的沖銷 前置時間(offset lead-time)。若用戶輸入針對母組裝品/组 件關係之負值時’齡從針對母零件之前置時間中縮短針 對該關係之前置時間。使用前置時間沖鎖法來延遲零件之 發放(issuing),直到在製造程序中的消耗點(cons,— point)為止。針對稱《使用於製造程序中的昂貴組件及/或 當製造程序挺長時’這種方法很有用。然而,因為延遲發 放,所以組件短缺和製造延誤的風險就會增力”當㈣ (exploding)相依性需求和規劃諸多訂單的到期日時,供應 系統100會對前置時間沖銷法加以考慮。能夠使用安全/緩 衝(safety/buffer)前置時間來調整採購或製造零件的前置 時間’以順應諸如兩個廠址之間的運輸或原料貨物檢驗這 樣的事件。譬如說:若供«提出-個日_,則零件可能 會在該日期交f ’但是卻有可能庫房缺f達三天之久。用 戶隨後會輸人三天的緩衝值,以容許這種延誤。 ⑽會產生針對-零件(採購或製造)之計劃供應:單 (pso) ’它具有安全緩衝值’並且會從針對ps〇之原 曰減去該緩衝前置時間。 ^ •存‘之”損耗率 採購零件之需求量 在另一實施例中,手戶可能定義 (shrinkage)。損耗率通常被表示為: •31 - 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(· 28 ) (demand quantity)的百分率。之所以需要它,是因為:由 於像有限存放壽命,遭竊,或蒸發之類的因素,故而實際 上可能不是所有的一種零件之現有量都是可用的。為了調 整這種可能性,用戶或供應程式就會載明損耗因數 (shrinkage factor),以便指示用戶對此零件預期的損失百 分率。然後,當供應系統1〇〇執行其計算以平衡供應和需求 時,需求量就會因損耗因數而膨脹。譬如說,若將零件A載 明為百分之五(5%)的損耗因數,並立輸入需求量為1〇〇 ; 則供應系統1 〇〇會在计异淨需求量(net reqUirements)之 前,將需求量增加到105。 同樣地,用戶可能定義:”良率”(yield)數量。良率雖然 是一種用來調整需求的百分率因數,但是它適用於零件的 製造,而不是存放量(shelf quantity)。雖然損耗率適用於 己經被採購的零件,但是良率卻只適用作為製造零件之程 序之一函數。因此,良率會影響用於製造中之银件數目。 言如說,當針對一零件之成品量(finished quantity)而撰 寫工令單時,成品量就等於用於製造中之組件數目。同樣 地,當針對一零件之成品量而撰寫工令單時,成品量就等 於訂單完成時之可用良品零件數目。 仍然是上述實例,在針對零件A的製造程序中,若它具有 百分之七十五(75 〇/〇)的平均良率,則用戶需要具有1〇5個零 件可供庫存需要之用。當將需求展開到較低階層時,供應 系統100就會使用良率因數(75°/〇)來使針對所有零件八組件 的需求膨脹。若在製造一種母零件(parent part)中岣等地 -32- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 x 297公釐)Green 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (27) Quantity replacement order. Phantom parts are used to logically flatten (flMten) the bill of materials. This is done when the manufacturer is operating a shop order-less shop floor; therefore, the supply system 100 is only used to plan purchase parts. As appropriate, use the corpse 1 to generate offset lead-time for the parent assembly / component relationship. If the user inputs a negative value for the parent assembly / component relationship, the 'age' shortens the previous setting time for the relationship from the previous setting time for the parent part. The lead-time lockout method is used to delay issuing of parts until the cons (-point) in the manufacturing process. This method is useful for "expensive components used in manufacturing processes and / or when manufacturing processes are long". However, because of delayed issuance, the risk of component shortages and manufacturing delays will increase. "When exploding dependent requirements and planning the expiry date of many orders, the supply system 100 will consider the lead time write-off method. Can Use the safety / buffer lead time to adjust the lead time for purchased or manufactured parts' to respond to events such as transportation between two sites or inspection of raw materials. For example: if «proposed-a Date, the part may be delivered on that date, but the warehouse may be missing for three days. The user will then enter a three-day buffer value to allow this delay. 针对 Target-parts (purchasing) (Or manufacturing) planned supply: single (pso) 'It has a safe buffer value' and will subtract the buffer lead time from the original for ps0. ^ • "Deposit" of the "depletion rate" The demand for purchasing parts is another In one embodiment, the user may define a shrinkage. The loss rate is usually expressed as: • 31-578071 A7 B7 V. The percentage of the demand quantity (· 28). It is needed because of factors such as limited shelf life, theft, or evaporation, so not all available quantities of one type of part may actually be available. To adjust this possibility, the user or supplier will specify a shrinkage factor to indicate the percentage of loss the user expects for this part. Then, when the supply system 100 performs its calculations to balance supply and demand, the demand will expand due to a loss factor. For example, if component A is specified as a loss factor of five percent (5%), and the input demand is 100, then the supply system 1000 will be calculated before the net reqUirements, Increase demand to 105. Similarly, the user may define: the "yield" quantity. Although yield is a percentage factor used to adjust demand, it is suitable for the manufacture of parts, not the shelf quantity. Although the wear rate is applicable to the part that has already been purchased, the yield rate is only applicable as a function of the process of manufacturing the part. Therefore, the yield will affect the number of silver pieces used in manufacturing. For example, when a work order is written for the finished quantity of a part, the quantity of the finished product is equal to the number of components used in manufacturing. Similarly, when a work order is written for the finished product quantity of a part, the finished product quantity is equal to the number of good quality parts available at the time of order completion. It is still the above example. In the manufacturing process for part A, if it has an average yield of 75% (75 00/0), the user needs to have 105 parts available for inventory needs. When expanding demand to lower levels, the supply system 100 uses a yield factor (75 ° / 0) to inflate demand for all parts and eight components. If you are manufacturing a parent part, etc. -32- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm)

裴 訂Bae Order

578071 A7 B7578071 A7 B7

使用組件之零件,則能夠將針對母零件所載明的良率因數 應用來調整組件之需求。然而’ 一種組件可能不必傳甘它 組件那樣經常地被報廢或消耗。然後,能夠使用良率置換 法(yield override)來改變針對該組件的良率。 同樣地’用戶可能定義··報廢值(scrap value),以表示 在製造期間所產生的廢棄物料。以和良率完全相同的方式 來處理報廢:毛需求量(gross requirements)的增加被用來 说明在一特定產品或組件之製造中的損失。 用戶可能使用PAL來定義工程變更(engineedng changes) ^當供應系統1〇〇處理一訂單以產生針對一零件之 有關聯組件的相依性需求時,它會對任何待處理(pending) 工程變更加以考慮。就任何產品結構而言,可能有幾個工 程變更預定會在規劃期限(planning horizon)内的不同時間 生效。當輸入一個工程變更時,該變更之特徵為:根據諸 多特定日期,關於一種(或許多)母/子零件關係之一結束 (end)或停止(stop)有效性,以及關於另一種關係之開始有 效性(start effectivity)。在供應系統100中的邏輯程式會 根據兩種不同觀點來查看工程變更(EC)的有效性。它能夠 利用在完成時的有效性來規劃物料,該有效性是基於母零 件的完成日期。在這種情形下,供應系統1〇〇會不顧母零件 的刚置時間而忽略·具有停止曰期都比母零件需求日期還 早的所有零件結構。兩者擇一地,在釋放日期(RlaW date)之有效性可能是基於子零件(child par〇的完成日期。 供應系統100會顧慮到(respects)母零件的前置時間和承認Using component parts, the yield factor specified for the parent part can be applied to adjust the component's needs. However, a component may not have to be rejected or consumed as often as other components. Yield override can then be used to change the yield for that component. Similarly, the user may define a scrap value to represent the waste material generated during manufacturing. Dispose of scrap in exactly the same way as yield: an increase in gross requirements is used to account for losses in the manufacture of a particular product or component. The user may use PAL to define engineering changes. ^ When the supply system 100 processes an order to generate a dependent demand for an associated component of a part, it will apply any pending engineering changes. consider. For any product structure, there may be several engineering changes scheduled to take effect at different times within the planning horizon. When entering an engineering change, the change is characterized by the validity of the end or stop of one (or many) parent / child part relationships based on a number of specific dates, and the start of another Effectiveness (start effectivity). The logic in the supply system 100 looks at the validity of the engineering change (EC) from two different perspectives. It is able to plan materials with availability at completion, which is based on the completion date of the parent part. In this case, the supply system 100 will ignore all the part structures that have a stop date earlier than the parent part demand date, regardless of the parent part's just-set time. Alternatively, the validity on the release date (RlaW date) may be based on the completion date of the child part 0. The supply system 100 will consider the lead time and recognition of the parent part

裝 訂Binding

-33- 五、發明説明(30 ) (honors)現存子零件配置(wip)。 供應系統100進一步容許重疊有效性達一時段之久在該 時段期間’將會藉由邏輯來展開兩種組件。然而,供應‘ ,100通常要求:所有開始和停止日期的顯式宣告。那就 疋’供應系統1GG不會假定:-既定組件起始日期意謂著替 換組件要停止β 用戶可能使用PAL來進-步定義:類型有效性(type effectivity) 〇 11 ϋ ^ ^ ^ ^ Μ ^ ^ ^ f 它之間交互進行時就有機會。這可能是導因於·資源約 束,前置時間,或經濟理由。供應系統1〇〇會考量類型有效 性,以便容許用戶··透過定㈣作或購買期限的日期範圍 加以排程。 在另一建構例中,用戶可能定義:適於組件的ABC分類 法(ABC classification)。ABC分類法容許用戶:基於如 最近計算的零件之實際毛需求量(actual gr〇ss requirements,簡稱AGR),根據金額價值來分類存貨。供 應系統100容許用戶:隨著每次執行而重新計算AGR。通 常,少數的項目佔組織之存貨價值的大部份比率,而多數 的項目則佔很小存貨價值比率。ABC代碼(ABC codes)容 許用戶:將零件分類成以下四類其中之一。A類(Type A) 項目··具有高價值,並且通常包括相對少數的項目,其價 值佔存貨價值的75到80%。這類項目通常是存貨項目的15 到20% βΒ類項目·具有中等價值,並且一般說來會包括多 數的項目,其價值佔存貨價值的15%。經常地,這類項目 -34- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 X 297公董) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(31 ) 通常是存貨項目的30到40%。C類項目:具有相對低價值, 並且表示存貨項的大部份,其價值幾乎是微不足道,只佔 存貨價值的5到10%。C類項目通常是存貨項目的40到 50%。然後,D類項目可能是所有其它組件。供應系統100 容許用戶:修改這些價值以適合規劃需要。 在操作中,供應系統100會將總標準成本乘以實際毛需求 量來達成針對每一零件的使用量金額價值(usage dollar value)。然後將使用量金額價值與總使用量金額價值相比 較,以確定它的相對百分率以及零件的ABC分類法。供應 系統100容許用戶:隨著每次執行而重新計算零件的ABC代 碼分類法。當規劃訂單時,供應系統100會使用現存的ABC 代碼分類法,諸如:由最近供應計劃行程所計算的那些分 類法。 ABC代碼邏輯會遵循這些步驟,方法是:將實際毛需求 量(AGR)乘以針對每一零件的總標準成本,並且將結果相 加來達成整年所有零件之成本。供應系統100然後會讀取針 對A,B,C,以及D類零件之用戶定義的ABC代碼控制定 義;並且將整年所有零件之總成本分成諸多界定百分率。 此外,供應系統100會以諸多零件的對應(AGR X總標準成 本)價值來排序(sort),從最高到最低。供應系統100然後將 諸多零件配置到群組A(group A),直到滿足但不超過針對 A類零件之價值百分率(percentage value)為止。若無法將 一A類零件配置到到群組A(諸如:增加它,就會超過針對A 類零件之價值百分率),則供應系統100會將它增加到群組 -35- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐)-33- V. Description of Invention (30) (honors) Existing sub-part configuration (wip). The supply system 100 further allows overlapping validity for a period of time during which the two components will be expanded logically. However, the supply of '100 usually requires: explicit declaration of all start and stop dates. Then 供应 'supply system 1GG will not assume:-the given component start date means that the replacement component will stop β users may use PAL to further define: type effectivity 〇11) ^ ^ ^ ^ Μ ^ ^ ^ f There are opportunities when it comes to interaction. This may be due to resource constraints, lead time, or economic reasons. The supply system 100 will consider the validity of the type in order to allow the user to schedule it through a date range that defines the duration of the operation or purchase. In another construction example, the user may define: ABC classification suitable for the component. The ABC taxonomy allows users to classify inventory based on the value of the amount based on the actual gross grout requirements (AGR) of the recently calculated parts. The supply system 100 allows the user to recalculate the AGR with each execution. In general, a small number of items account for a large percentage of an organization's inventory value, while most items account for a small inventory value ratio. ABC codes allow users to classify parts into one of four categories. Type A items are of high value and usually include a relatively small number of items, with values ranging from 75 to 80% of the value of the inventory. This type of project is usually 15 to 20% of ββ items in inventory. They are of medium value and generally include most items, and their value accounts for 15% of the value of the inventory. Often, this type of item -34- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public directors) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (31) Usually 30 to 40% of the inventory item. Category C items: They have relatively low value and represent most of the inventory items, whose value is almost trivial, accounting for only 5 to 10% of the inventory value. Category C items are usually 40 to 50% of inventory items. Class D projects may then be all other components. The provisioning system 100 allows users to: modify these values to suit planning needs. In operation, the supply system 100 multiplies the total standard cost by the actual gross demand to achieve a usage dollar value for each part. The value of the usage amount is then compared to the value of the total usage amount to determine its relative percentage and the ABC classification of the part. The provisioning system 100 allows the user to: recalculate the ABC code taxonomy of the part with each execution. When planning an order, the supply system 100 uses existing ABC code classifications, such as those calculated from the most recently supplied planned itinerary. The ABC code logic follows these steps by multiplying the actual gross demand (AGR) by the total standard cost for each part and adding the results to reach the cost of all parts throughout the year. The supply system 100 then reads the user-defined ABC code control definitions for A, B, C, and D parts; and divides the total cost of all parts throughout the year into a number of defined percentages. In addition, the supply system 100 will sort by the corresponding (AGR X total standard cost) value of many parts, from highest to lowest. The supply system 100 then arranges the many parts into group A until it meets but does not exceed the percent value for the class A parts. If a class A part cannot be allocated to group A (such as: increasing it will exceed the percentage value for class A parts), the supply system 100 will increase it to group -35- This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm)

五、發明説明(32 ) B。供應系統1〇〇會以相同方式來將諸多零件配置到群組 B,並且重複適於群組C和D的配置程序。 用戶也可能建立諸多訂購政策(order policies)。特別 是,供應系統100會產生PSO,而建議數量則都是基於支配 著零件和代碼的訂購政策:逐批訂購(lot for lot)。 1.固定訂購量 2·時段訂購量(period order quantity) 3. 固定天數 4. 供應天數 5·訂購點(order point) 6.訂購總額(gorss order) 7·表大批量大小(maximum batch size) 通常,計劃訂單之到期曰是基於首次未屨行需求的日期。 然而,訂購點政策是一種訂單投入(〇rder launchin幻方 法;因此,計劃訂單之到期曰是··預計可用性(pr〇jected availability)降到5丁購點之下的曰期加上零件之前置時間。 亚且,當輸入或編輯針對項目中之一零件的規劃和控制資 訊時,用戶能夠載明:將會由除了訂購總額訂購政策外的 任何一種訂購政策所使用的最小及/或倍數訂購量。供應 統1〇〇的計劃訂購量較等於或大於零件之最小訂講量;* 果有的話。用戶也可能定義:最大訂購量,它迫使計劃 購量總是等於或小於該數值。同祕量之任何零件的計劃訂睛量總是被上約整 最接近的倍數。 -36-5. Description of the invention (32) B. The supply system 100 will arrange many parts to group B in the same way, and repeat the configuration procedure suitable for groups C and D. Users may also establish many order policies. In particular, the supply system 100 generates a PSO, and the recommended quantities are based on an ordering policy that governs parts and codes: order for lot. 1. Fixed order quantity 2. Period order quantity 3. Fixed days 4. Supply days 5 • Order point 6. Order order (gorss order) 7 • Maximum batch size Generally, the planned order expiration date is based on the first unspent demand. However, the order point policy is an order investment (〇rder launchin magic method; therefore, the expiry date of the planned order is ... the date when the estimated availability (pr0jected availability) drops below 5 points plus the purchase of parts Lead time. Also, when entering or editing the planning and control information for a part in the project, the user can specify that the minimum and / will be used by any order policy other than the total order policy. Or multiple order quantity. The planned order quantity of the supply system 100 is equal to or greater than the minimum order quantity of the parts; * If applicable, the user may also define: the maximum order quantity, which forces the planned order quantity to always be equal to or less The value. The planned finishing amount of any part with the same amount is always rounded to the nearest multiple.

裝 訂Binding

線 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(33 ) 逐批訂購政策是最淺易的規劃政策。在供應系統1 〇 〇遭遇 不滿足需求的地方,它會確定零件之淨需求,進而建議一 份訂單來滿足需求。除非透過最小,倍數,或最大數值加 以修改;建議數量將會相同,逐批訂購,就像不滿足需求 那樣。 固定訂購量訂購政策是一種基於資料庫中針對零件所載 明之固定數量而建議一份訂單(或諸多訂單)的淺易政策。當 供應系統100遭遇不滿足需求時,它會計算淨需求量,進而 建議和需要滿足淨需求量一樣多之依照固定數量批量大小 (lot size)的訂單。 在零件是由時段訂購量訂購政策所支配的地方,供應系 統100會基於:零件之不滿足需求首例,加上像由用戶所载 明之針對先前時段數目的淨需求量而建議訂購量。視情況 地,只有非零需求(non-zero demand)之時段才包括在内。 因此,若用戶陳述雖有5個時段,但其中卻有一些零需求之 時段;則期限(horizon)將會被擴大,直到遭遇5個正需求 (positive demand)之時段為止。 在零件是由固定天數訂購政策所支配的地方,供應系統 100會基於:零件之不滿足需求的首例,加上像由用戶所載 明之針對先前天數的淨需求量而建議訂購量。通常,先前 所有天數都被計數,因而包括無需求(無訂單)的那些天數。 這種訂購政策與時段訂購量訂購政策有所不同。固定天數 訂購政策與供應天數訂購政策類似,除了它專用於零件但 與零件之ABC分類法無關聯之外。 •37-Line 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (33) The batch order policy is the easiest planning policy. Where the supply system 1000 encounters unsatisfactory demand, it determines the net demand for parts and then proposes an order to meet the demand. Unless modified by minimum, multiple, or maximum values; the recommended quantity will be the same, ordering in batches as if the demand is not met. The fixed order quantity ordering policy is an easy policy that recommends an order (or multiple orders) based on a fixed amount of parts in the database. When the supply system 100 encounters unsatisfied demand, it calculates the net demand, and then suggests as many orders with a fixed lot size as there are net needs. Where parts are governed by the time-order ordering policy, the supply system 100 will suggest the order based on the first instance of unsatisfied demand for parts, plus the net demand for the number of previous time periods as specified by the user. Optionally, only non-zero demand periods are included. Therefore, if the user states that there are 5 periods, but there are some periods of zero demand; the horizon will be expanded until 5 periods of positive demand are encountered. Where parts are governed by a fixed-day ordering policy, the supply system 100 will recommend the order based on the first instance of unsatisfied demand for the part, plus the net demand for the previous days as stated by the user. Generally, all previous days are counted, and thus include those days when there is no demand (no order). This ordering policy differs from the time-order ordering policy. The fixed-day ordering policy is similar to the supply-days ordering policy, except that it is specific to parts but not related to the ABC classification of parts. • 37-

578071 A7 B7____五、發明説明(34 ) 供應天數訂購政策會基於每個零件的ABC分類法而產生 諸多PSO。當供應系統1〇〇使用供應天數訂購政策而產生針 對一零件之PSO時,訂購量就會大到足夠涵蓋其次的(η)天 需求,其中將(η)載明於ABC代碼中。若一種訂購量倍數存 在於零件之資料庫中,則將建議訂購量約整為下一最高倍 數。例如,對於總是按打訂購的零件而言,應該使用訂購 倍數(12的倍數)。 訂購點訂購政策是一種訂單投入方法,它不像其它訂購 政策,在於:供應系統100會建議具有到期日與首次不滿足 需求(淨需求)之日期匹配的諸多訂單。用戶可能載明庫存點 或水準,在該處應該發出訂單。當一零件之預計可用性降 到其訂購點之下時,供應系統100將會建議一份訂單。建議 訂購的數量將會在IM表中。訂單之到期日就是:可用性預 計會降到訂購點之下的日期加上零件之前置時間。理論 上,若針對一零件之需求是平穩的,則在存貨被補貨之 前,預計可用性絕不會降到零以下。若它降到零以下,則 供應系統100會建議:按照可用性降到零以下之數量的一份 訂單。將訂購點訂購政策使用在逐日或逐週都有均等需求 (even demand)之需求量平穩地發生的地方。訂購點數值將 藉由考量零件之前置時間和在此前置時間期間的典型需求 來建立。譬如說,若前置時間是一週,並且需求通常是每 週50個單位;則用戶可能將訂購點設定在·· 50個單位加上 一個安全因數(safety factor)處。 相對照下,訂購總額訂購政策會迴避(bypass)大多數的 -38-578071 A7 B7____ V. Description of Invention (34) The supply days ordering policy will generate many PSOs based on the ABC classification of each part. When the supply system 100 uses the supply day ordering policy to generate a PSO for a part, the order quantity will be large enough to cover the next (η) day demand, where (η) is stated in the ABC code. If an order quantity multiple exists in the parts database, the recommended order quantity will be rounded to the next highest multiple. For example, for parts that are always ordered by order, the order multiple (a multiple of 12) should be used. The order-point ordering policy is an order input method, unlike other ordering policies, in that the supply system 100 proposes a number of orders with a maturity date that matches the date of the first unmet demand (net demand). The user may indicate the inventory point or level at which the order should be placed. When the expected availability of a part drops below its order point, the supply system 100 will suggest an order. The recommended order quantity will be on the IM form. The expiry date of an order is: the date the availability is expected to fall below the order point plus the time before the part is placed. In theory, if the demand for a part is steady, it is expected that the availability will never fall below zero before the inventory is replenished. If it drops below zero, the supply system 100 will suggest an order for an amount that falls below zero. Use the point-of-purchase ordering policy where demand that has even demand day-to-day or week-to-week occurs smoothly. The order point value will be established by considering the part lead time and the typical requirements during this lead time. For example, if the lead time is one week and the demand is usually 50 units per week; the user may set the order point at 50 units plus a safety factor. In contrast, the total order subscription policy will bypass most of the -38-

裝 訂Binding

k 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4规格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 _ B7 _ 五、發明説明(35 ) 正常供應規劃邏輯。供應系統1〇〇(現有存貨和計劃訂單)與 需求不平衡,並且未建議諸訂單來涵蓋針對零件之毛需求 量。換成是,供應系統100會藉由產生針對零件之組件的需 求登載項而將需求量傳到下一階層。這種訂購政策作為從 毛需求量規劃系統轉換到供應系統100中的一個暫時步驟是 挺有用的。 最大批量大小訂購政策與固定天數政策類似。然而,有 鏗於固定天數政策會計算時段之需求量,並且將總供應量 置於需要之首日上;而最大批量大小政策則會將供應量分 成諸多預定批量。用戶會:1)定義期待確定用來計算供應 量之總需求量的天數;以及2)確定打算用來分割在訂購時 段(order period)内所計算之總需求量的批量大小。在用來 计异訂單連同批量大小的邏輯中,也將會考量最小值,最 大值,以及倍數之功能。 用戶也可能定義··測量單位轉換因數(c〇nversi〇n factor)。測量單位(Unit of Measure,簡稱UM)是為了製 造程序而控制項目所表示的單位,譬如說是··呎和吋。um 資訊是參考資訊,因此不是供應系統1〇〇之計算本身的一部 份。供應系統100使用UM轉換因數來將製造所需的單位轉 換成採購或儲存項目的單位,或者轉換成每組裝品需要量 數值。譬如說,膠帶和線材都是能夠由製造程序以單吋為 单位加以使用的物料,但它們卻以百呎捲筒為單位加以採 購。 用戶也可能定義:每組裝品需要量。每組裝品需要量 -39-k This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 _ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (35) Normal supply planning logic. The supply system 100 (existing inventory and planned orders) is unbalanced with demand, and orders are not recommended to cover the gross demand for parts. Instead, the supply system 100 will pass the demand to the next level by generating a demand entry for the component's component. This ordering policy is useful as a temporary step in transitioning from a gross demand planning system to a supply system 100. The maximum batch size ordering policy is similar to the fixed-day policy. However, some fixed-day policies will calculate the demand for the period and put the total supply on the first day of need; while the maximum batch size policy will divide the supply into a number of scheduled batches. Users will: 1) define the number of days that they expect to determine the total demand used to calculate the supply; and 2) determine the batch size that they intend to use to divide the total demand calculated during the order period. In the logic used to calculate the difference order and the batch size, the minimum, maximum, and multiple functions will also be considered. The user may also define a measurement unit conversion factor (conformance factor). Unit of Measure (UM for short) is a unit that controls the item for the purpose of manufacturing procedures, for example, feet and inches. The um information is reference information and therefore is not part of the calculation of the supply system 100 itself. The supply system 100 uses a UM conversion factor to convert a unit required for manufacturing into a unit for purchasing or storing an item, or a value required for each assembly. For example, tapes and wires are materials that can be used in units of one inch by the manufacturing process, but they are purchased in units of one hundred feet. The user may also define: the amount required per assembly. Requirement per assembly -39-

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(36 ) (Quantity Per Assmbly,簡稱QPA)是:在製造其母組裝 品中所需子零件(組件)的數量。供應系統1〇〇使用它來計算 在聯網程序期間的需求量。可能將QPA數值表示為整數或 小數。供應系統100可能在由用戶所載明的一種小數精度 (decimal precision)之後加以約整任何這樣的小數。 在另一實施例中,供應系統100之庫存(INV)表會支援: 在每個規劃現場内的多數盤存儲存器(inventory stores)。 若用戶使用在用戶之製造環境中的多數分離盤存儲存器, 則用戶能夠儲備(carry)和維持來自那些儲存器的現有數 值。INV表也會支援:針對在每個盤存儲存器中之每一項 目的特定安全存量因數。這樣保證··當規劃訂單時,供應 系統100的後續執行都會對零件之安全存量需求加以考慮。 視情況地,供應系統1〇〇可能展開工令單。這種特點使用 戶忐夠將諸多新的未規劃供應工令單增加到一計劃中,然 後再使供應系統100產生有關聯的供應需求量。工令單(與 其有關聯的AR),基本上都是具有有效性日期的單階 = ingle-level)物料表。它們不是從主機MRp系統輸入就 疋在供應系統100以手動方式產生。在正常情況下,供應系 統100邏輯會將工令單當作供應使用,並且在針對工令單上 之零件的需求超過供應的地方,供應系統1〇〇會產生針對工 '單上之零件的PS0。然後,在正常情況下,雖然供應系 統100不會展開工令單以霉定哪些零件投入其中和什麼零件 有短缺;但是卻會假定··己經裝備了所需的一切事物。在 某些情況下,存貨將會短缺··用來完全地裝備(kit)一份工 x 297公董) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(37 ) 令單所需的一個零件(或諸多零件)。然後,供應系統100會 核對任何工令單上的短缺;並且,若發現有任何短缺,則 將短缺視為需求,進而將會尋找必需存貨或建議適當供應 品。然而,在”如果…就怎犧”分析中,用戶可能想要將一 份新增既未規劃又未裝備的工令單(WO)增加到計劃中來模 擬供應。用戶也可能希望供應系統100確定:將會需要哪些 零件來裝備新的WO。在這種情形下,用戶將會希望供應系 統100加以考量投入工令單中的所有零件。供應系統100隨 後會展開工令單;並且在供應計劃行程期間,供應系統100 會:查看產品結構表和確定哪些零件投入工令單中,公告 (post)針對每個零件的AR(實際需求量)作為供應計劃中的 需求,以及找尋INV或建議PS0必需供應品。在SPA(供應 計劃行動)表中所產生的AR將具有一個要求曰期(required date);該日期不是對應於工令單之開始日期,就是對應於 由針對零件之生產前置時間所沖銷(offset)的工令單開始曰 期。若在供應系統100的處理期間,新工令單被下推或上 拉;則與它有關聯的AR也會被下推或上拉,使得:AR要求 曰期與工令單之重新計算開始日期一致。 再者,供應系統100容許用戶:按照一種以天數測量的載 明因數,將針對諸多選定零件的要求日期加以上拉。將這 種特點稱為”按照天數的安全存量"(Safety Stock By Number of Days)。應該注意的是:’’按照天數的安全存量 ’’並不會增加訂購量,而只會以比需要還早的方式來將訂單 加以上拉。 -41 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 5. The invention description (36) (Quantity Per Assmbly, QPA for short) is the number of sub-parts (assemblies) required to manufacture its parent assembly. The supply system 100 uses it to calculate the demand during the networking process. QPA values may be expressed as integers or decimals. The supply system 100 may round any such decimal number after a decimal precision specified by the user. In another embodiment, the inventory (INV) table of the supply system 100 supports: a majority of inventory stores in each planning site. If the user uses most of the separate disk storage devices in the user's manufacturing environment, the user can carry and maintain the existing values from those storage devices. The INV table also supports: a specific safety stock factor for each item in each disk memory. This guarantees that ... when planning the order, the subsequent execution of the supply system 100 will take into account the safety stock requirements of the parts. Depending on the circumstances, the supply system 100 may launch work orders. This feature allows users to add many new unplanned supply orders to a plan, and then cause the supply system 100 to generate an associated supply demand. The work order (the AR associated with it) is basically a single-level = ingle-level bill of materials with a validity date. They are not manually input from the host MRP system at the supply system 100. Under normal circumstances, the supply system 100 logic will use the work order as a supply, and where the demand for the parts on the work order exceeds the supply, the supply system 100 will generate a PS0. Then, under normal circumstances, although the supply system 100 will not start a work order to determine which parts are put into it and what parts are in short supply, it will be assumed that everything has been equipped. In some cases, the inventory will be in short supply. · To completely kit (kit of a worker x 297 public directors) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (37) A part (or parts) required for the order . The supply system 100 then checks for shortages on any work orders; and if any shortages are found, the shortages are treated as demand, which in turn will look for necessary inventory or suggest appropriate supplies. However, in a "what if ..." analysis, users may want to add a new work order (WO) that is neither planned nor equipped to the plan to simulate supply. The user may also want the supply system 100 to determine which parts will be needed to equip the new WO. In this case, the user will want the supply system 100 to consider all the parts put into the work order. The supply system 100 will then start the work order; and during the supply planning journey, the supply system 100 will: view the product structure table and determine which parts are put into the work order, and post an AR (actual demand) for each part ) As a demand in the supply plan, and looking for INV or suggested PS0 essential supplies. The AR generated in the SPA (Supply Plan Action) form will have a required date; this date will either correspond to the start date of the work order, or it will be written off by the lead time for production of the part ( offset) of the work order. If during the processing of the supply system 100, a new work order is pushed down or pulled up; the AR associated with it will also be pushed down or pulled up, so that AR requires the date and recalculation of the work order to start The dates are consistent. Furthermore, the supply system 100 allows the user to pull up the required dates for many selected parts according to a stated factor measured in days. This feature is called "Safety Stock By Number of Days". It should be noted that "Safety Stock By Number of Days" does not increase the order quantity, but only It's an early way to pull up the order. -41-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

線 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(38 ) 在一較佳實施例中,用戶可能建構SmartBill。 SmartBill是供應應用程式中的一種任選特點;並且,當致 能或’’附加"(added on)可組態替代能力時,供應系統100就 會獲得能力來動態地組態其物料表(BOM)。當用戶選擇可 組態替代法時,供應系統100會對SmartCon(智慧型組態) 程式(它是一種執行在SmartBill產品中之實際組態計算的 程式)提出一項請求;該程式會根據已經由PAL方面的產品 工程師加以載明的法則,依序地組態替代裝配件。藉由提 供一種組態替代裝配件表,SmartCon然後對供應作出回 應。 藉由捕獲諸多工程組態模型(engineering configuration models)以及利用供應系統100將它們加以整合,客戶訂單 實際上能夠產生一種動態製造物料表,而不是標準BOM。 其結果是:SmartBILL,它是基於工程規範說明而不是預 定料號(part numbers)。優點是:SmartBILL保留了工程 模型的智能,對容許交替法(alternates)和資源相依性加以 考慮。先進SmartBILL也能夠包含附加約束,因而容許: 針對成本和品質,以及準時或迅速交貨而言,使諸多替代 法最佳化。其結杲是··訂單允諾較快,而針對延誤裝運之 物料約束的可能性則較少。 可組態替代法的目的是:總是用來組態由供應系統100所 請求之目標產品的精確數量;並且當這麼做時,則是用來 選擇:交貨的最佳時段(time prame)和各種替代子產品的 最佳數量。在諸多競爭子產品中選出最好的,都是基於: -42- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 五、發明説明(39 ) 評估匕們供給的 > 源和存在於庫存巾的每個子產品數量。 現在插述供應系統100*smartcon組態經歷其資料交換 的過程。首先,供應系統10〇會呼叫SmartCon和詢問用戶 己經旗標(flagged)為可組態的每個零件。供應系統1〇〇會 詢問是否有適於它的PAL模型;若有pAL模型,則 SmartCon需要哪些零件用來製造可組態零件。Smartc⑽ 會尋找和載入其名稱對應於被請求產品的產品屬性檔案。 SmartCon也會尋找在模型中的每項產品和計算每項資源中 有多少數量是該產品消耗(若它是負的數量)或供給(若它是 正的數量)的。針對所有這些結構的這些數量之總和表示: §組悲一種目標產品時所需的資源數量。SmartC〇n會以所 需數篁(由供應系統100所獲得)和資源列表來更新在負載模 型(loaded model)中的目標產品,該資源都是上面計算的 那些資源之反。這種列表表示··當組態若干數量的某種目 祆產。σ時所消耗(或供給)的資源。將模型之變數區段加以計 算。只有當可能需要某些重複或複雜計算時才會使用變 數,然後將該變數使用在組態項目的計算中。8111打比〇11會 執行一次行程,以便計算··在庫存紀錄中所發現之針對每 個時段的組態結果。 為人所熟知的是:在每種情形下,最後結果將會包括由 供應系統100所請求之目標產品的數量。然而,使用諸多資 源平衡法則(the rules of resource balancing)來平衡每種 資源類型的消費者和供給者,也會組態子產品(chUd products)。因而產生的子產品數目將視:哪些資源是每項 578071 A7 _B7__ 五、發明説明(40 ) 產品提供(及/或消耗)的,以及在現存存貨中可用的數量(從 現存存貨中配置總比多組態一種特定產品好)而定。基於哪 一種組態表示最低成本(使用輸入成本資料)而選擇來自各種 組態(每個時段都有一種組態)的最佳結果。SmartCon會凑 合諸多結果和回應,將具有在返回(returned)組態中之載明 零件的訂單供應給供應系統1〇〇。 現在轉移到圖1D,供應系統100包括各種成份以便協助 用戶來檢查許多業務方面。如圖1D中所繪示的,供應系統 100可能包括諸多成份的各種組合,該成份包括:供應規劃 程式200,資源最佳化程式300,基於約束的主規劃程式 400,產品變更分析程式500,比較器600,資源需求規劃 程式700,有限資源規劃程式800,客戶允諾程式900,以 及互動式主排程器1000。將這些成份中的每種成份之操作 更加詳細地描述於下。 供應規劃裎式200 如圖1D中所繪示的,供應系統1〇〇包括供應規劃程式 200。供應規劃程式200是供應系統100的功能核心。來自 供應規劃程式200的輸出是其它解析功能的基礎,因此將會 由其它供應系統100應用程式加以使用,以便產生它們各個 的結果。供應規劃程式200執行功能是··產生用來滿足用戶 之產品需求的供應配置計劃。如在圖2之一供應規劃方法 201中所繪示的,供應規劃程式200首先嘗試藉由使用現存 存貨來滿足針對一個SKU的需求。若目前存貨不足,則供 應規劃程式200會轉移到:製作,尋源,以及採購程序;它 -44- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(41 ) 們載明用來生產,運送,或購買針對需求所需的SKU之需 求量。供應規劃程式200通常會首先嘗試使用最高優先序程 序來滿足需求。當供應規劃程式200發現一種能夠滿足某些 或所有需求單的程序時,供應規劃程式200就會產生一種供 應訂單來建構:製作,尋源,或採購程序。供應規劃程式 200會繼續進行;直到滿足需求為止,或者直到不再有適於 該SKU的程序為止。供應規劃程式200會同時查看物料可用 性和生產能力,終於導致基於存在於一家公司中的諸多約 束之可行性計劃(feasible plans),步驟2 10。用戶能夠基 於其企業策略而設定其它約束,諸如:計算安全存量的法 則,以及隨著客戶訂單而消耗預測量,步驟220。在產生供 應計劃中,供應規劃程式200可能使用標準美國生產與存貨 管制學會(American Production and Inventory Control Society,簡稱APICS)MRP邏輯來建構物料需求規劃 (MRP)。兩者擇一地,在使用供應品的資源配^置期間,用 戶可能指定任何其它邏輯以便遵循,就像在步驟220中那 樣。 當產生供應計劃時,供應規劃程式最好是顧慮到由用戶 所載明或在供應系統100中所預先定義的約束,諸如:物料 可用性和生產能力。供應規劃程式也可能使用:用戶針對 諸如預測調整和安全存量計算而設定的法則。明確地說, 供應規劃程式200最好是容許用戶載明一種優先序方案 (priority scheme),使得:最先滿足對一家公司而言是最 重要的訂單。譬如說,用戶可能將一種高優先序指定給大 -45- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)Line 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (38) In a preferred embodiment, the user may construct a SmartBill. SmartBill is an optional feature in the provisioning application; and, when enabled or `` added on '' configurable alternative capabilities, the provisioning system 100 gains the ability to dynamically configure its bill of materials ( BOM). When the user selects a configurable replacement method, the supply system 100 will make a request to the SmartCon (smart configuration) program (a program that performs the actual configuration calculation in the SmartBill product); the program will The rules specified by the PAL product engineer configure the replacement assemblies in order. By providing a configuration replacement assembly table, SmartCon then responds to supply. By capturing many engineering configuration models and integrating them with the supply system 100, customer orders can actually generate a dynamic manufacturing bill of materials instead of a standard BOM. The result: SmartBILL, which is based on engineering specifications rather than part numbers. The advantage is that SmartBILL retains the intelligence of the engineering model and takes into account allowable alternatives and resource dependencies. Advanced SmartBILL can also include additional constraints, allowing: to optimize many alternatives for cost and quality, as well as on-time or prompt delivery. The result is that orders are promised faster and material constraints for delayed shipments are less likely. The purpose of the configurable substitution method is: always to configure the exact quantity of the target product requested by the supply system 100; and when doing so, it is used to select: the best time prame for delivery And the optimal number of various alternative sub-products. The best choice among many competing sub-products is based on: -42- This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 578071 V. Description of the invention (39) Evaluation of the supply of daggers ≫ Source and quantity of each sub-product present in the inventory towel. Now I will intersect the process of 100 * smartcon configuration of the supply system through its data exchange. First, the supply system 100 calls SmartCon and asks the user if each part has been flagged as configurable. The supply system 100 will ask if there is a PAL model suitable for it; if there is a pAL model, which parts does SmartCon need to make configurable parts. Smartc⑽ looks for and loads a product attribute file whose name corresponds to the requested product. SmartCon also looks for each product in the model and calculates how much of each resource is consumed by the product (if it is a negative quantity) or supplied (if it is a positive quantity). The sum of these quantities for all of these structures represents: § The amount of resources needed to group a target product. SmartCon will update the target product in the loaded model with the required number (obtained by the supply system 100) and the resource list, which is the opposite of those resources calculated above. This list indicates when a certain number of certain products are configured. Resources consumed (or supplied) at σ. Calculate the variable section of the model. A variable is used only when some repetitive or complex calculations may be required, and then used in the calculation of the configuration project. The 8111 match will perform a trip in order to calculate the configuration results for each time period found in the inventory records. It is well known that, in each case, the final result will include the number of target products requested by the supply system 100. However, using the rules of resource balancing to balance consumers and suppliers of each resource type also configures chUd products. The number of resulting sub-products will depend on: which resources are each 578071 A7 _B7__ V. Description of the invention (40) The product is provided (and / or consumed) and the amount available in existing inventory (the total ratio is allocated from the existing inventory It is better to configure one specific product). Based on which configuration represents the lowest cost (using input cost data), select the best result from a variety of configurations (one configuration for each time period). SmartCon will take advantage of the many results and responses to supply the order with the specified parts in the returned configuration to the supply system 100. Turning now to FIG. 1D, the provisioning system 100 includes various components to assist the user in examining many aspects of the business. As shown in FIG. 1D, the supply system 100 may include various combinations of many components, including: a supply planning program 200, a resource optimization program 300, a constraint-based master planning program 400, and a product change analysis program 500. Comparator 600, resource demand planning program 700, limited resource planning program 800, customer commitment program 900, and interactive master scheduler 1000. The operation of each of these ingredients is described in more detail below. Supply Planning Formula 200 As shown in FIG. 1D, the supply system 100 includes a supply planning program 200. The supply planner 200 is a functional core of the supply system 100. The output from the supply planner 200 is the basis for other analysis functions and will therefore be used by other supply system 100 applications to produce their individual results. The execution function of the supply planner 200 is to generate a supply configuration plan for satisfying a user's product demand. As illustrated in one of the supply planning methods 201 of FIG. 2, the supply planning program 200 first attempts to meet the demand for an SKU by using existing inventory. If the current inventory is insufficient, the supply planning program 200 will be transferred to: production, source sourcing, and procurement procedures; it-44- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 5 (4) The invention descriptions (41) specify the required amount of SKUs used to produce, ship, or purchase the SKUs required for the demand. The supply planner 200 will usually first try to satisfy demand using the highest priority program. When the supply planner 200 finds a process that can satisfy some or all of the demand orders, the supply planner 200 generates a supply order to construct: a production, source sourcing, or procurement process. The supply planner 200 continues; until the demand is met, or until there are no more procedures for the SKU. The supply planner 200 checks material availability and production capacity at the same time, and finally leads to a feasible plan based on many constraints that exist in a company, steps 2-10. The user can set other constraints based on his corporate policy, such as the rules for calculating the safety stock, and the consumption of the forecasted amount as the customer orders, step 220. In generating a supply plan, the supply planning program 200 may use standard American Production and Inventory Control Society (APICS) MRP logic to construct a material demand planning (MRP). Alternatively, during resource provisioning using supplies, the user may specify any other logic to follow, as in step 220. When generating a supply plan, the supply planner preferably takes into account constraints specified by the user or pre-defined in the supply system 100, such as: material availability and production capacity. The supply planner may also use: rules set by the user for things like forecast adjustments and safety stock calculations. Specifically, the supply planner 200 preferably allows the user to specify a priority scheme so that the order that is most important to a company is satisfied first. For example, the user may assign a high priority to large -45- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(42 ) 用戶也能夠 量訂講的客戶們’以保證·滿足他們的需求 載明··針對預測訂單(即:為預期遠期訂單而預先採取的— 動)和安全存量訂單(即··用來維持所需最低庫存水準的行動) 的項目和位置優先序。由供應規劃程式2〇〇所建議的1單^ 後可能被輸出到另一系統’步驟250;使用:關於將二 其它系統輸入到供應系統100,與在伴隨著圖1(:之本文中 所描述的那些方法類似的方法。 仍然是圖2,在設置資料庫110之後,用戶可能依照一種 週期性常規循環步驟240(例如:一個月兩次或每週)來產生 供應計劃。用戶可能以批量模式或互動方式來產生供應規 劃程式200。用戶可能首先以批量方式來產生針對所sku有 的計劃,然後與具有例外的一小部份SKU進行互動式運 作0 仍然是圖2,供應規劃程式200可能產生一個或更多輸出 表(output tables),該表用來摘要供應規劃程式2〇()的發現 資訊,步驟230 ;而這種輸出表則可能被儲存於資料庫11〇 中。供應規劃程式200也可能產生一種用來摘要建議訂單以 使所需供應變更生效的報表。下列報表都是供應規劃程式 2〇〇專用的;摘要報表,頁式報表(sheet report),訂購單 行動報表,工令單行動報表,過剩存貨報表,供應規劃程 式200缺料報表,轉移訂單行動報表,以及關鍵物料短缺報 表0 通常’供應規劃程式200嘗試平衡現存存貨供應和客戶需 求。當供應和需求不平衡時,供應規劃程式200就會建議: __ -46- 本紙痕尺度適用中® ®家樣準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公羡) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(43 ) 重新排定或取消工令單,採購單,以及現場間訂單 (intersite orders)。供應規劃程式200也可能產生新計劃供 應訂單/現場間訂單。在諸多操作中,供應規劃程式200能 夠建議的是: 空白(Blank):因為未曾以任何方式來重新排程或限制,所 以不需要行動之一記錄; 新增(New): 已經產生用來平衡供應和需求之一記錄; 下推(Push):重新排程到比其原始曰期還晚之一供應品; 上拉(Pull): 重新排程到比其原始日期還早之一供應品; 取消(Cancelled):因需求不足而取消之一供應品; (下推): 建議重新排程到一個較晚曰期之一供應品, 但是它會由供應規劃程式200設定加以過濾 (filtered),以便從其原始日期起保持不 變; (上拉): 建議重新排程到一個較早日期之一供應品, 但是它會由供應規劃程式200設定加以過 濾,以便從其原始曰期起保持不變:以及 確定(Firm):在供應表(描述於下)中已經被設定為’’確定’’ 之一供應品,於是,不管供應/需求的需要 如何,都是不變的。 現在,將在步驟230中之輸出表的產生更加詳細地描述。 輸出表有助於容許用戶:解釋在供應計劃中所建議的諸多 替代法。步驟230可能包括:產生供應規劃程式200行(SPA) 表。SPA表會顯示預定替代供應和需求。當一種主零件的 -47- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (42) Users can also measure the amount of customers' to ensure that their needs are met and stated ... For forecast orders (that is, actions taken in advance for anticipated forward orders) and Priority of items and locations for safety stock orders (that is, actions to maintain the required minimum inventory levels). The 1 order suggested by the supply planner 2000 may be output to another system after step '250; use: About inputting two other systems into the supply system 100, and in the context of FIG. 1 (: Those described are similar. Still in Figure 2, after setting up the database 110, the user may follow a periodic routine cycle step 240 (eg, twice a month or weekly) to generate the supply plan. The user may batch Mode or interactive way to generate the supply planning program 200. The user may first generate a plan for all skus in batch mode, and then interact with a small number of SKUs with exceptions. 0 is still Figure 2, the supply planning program 200 One or more output tables may be generated, which are used to summarize the discovery information of the supply planning program 20 (), step 230; and such output tables may be stored in the database 110. Supply planning The program 200 may also generate a report that summarizes the proposed order for the required supply changes to take effect. The following reports are specific to the supply planning program 200; Reports, sheet reports, purchase order action reports, work order action reports, excess inventory reports, supply planner 200 lack of materials reports, transfer order action reports, and critical material shortage reports 0 Usually 'supply planner 200 Try to balance the existing inventory supply with customer demand. When supply and demand are unbalanced, the supply planner 200 will suggest: __ -46- This paper mark standard is applicable ® ® Home Sample Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) ) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (43) Reschedule or cancel work orders, purchase orders, and intersite orders. The supply planning program 200 may also generate new planned supply orders / intersite orders. In many In operation, what the supply planner 200 can suggest is: Blank: Since there is no rescheduling or restriction in any way, no record of one action is needed; New: has been generated to balance supply and One record of demand; Push: reschedule to a supply later than its original date; Pull: reschedule to its original Cancelled: A supply cancelled due to insufficient demand; (Push-down): It is recommended to reschedule a supply to a later date, but it will be scheduled by the supply planner. 200 setting is filtered to remain unchanged from its original date; (pull-up): It is recommended to reschedule a supply to an earlier date, but it will be filtered by the supply planner 200 setting so that It has remained unchanged since its original date: and Firm: a supply that has been set to `` OK '' in the supply table (described below), so regardless of supply / demand needs Is constant. The generation of the output table in step 230 will now be described in more detail. The output table helps allow the user to explain the many alternatives suggested in the supply plan. Step 230 may include generating a 200-line (SPA) table of the supply planner. The SPA table will show the scheduled alternative supply and demand. When a main part's -47- this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(44 ) 供應不足以屨行需求時,就會針對一預定替代零件而規畫】 一種替代法。供應品可能是:現有存貨,訂購單和工令 單,或者申購單。在SPA表中,可能會有兩種供應規劃糕 式200(SP)零件類型:SPS,具有一預定替代供應的零件; 以及SPD,具有因此安排之一預定需求的零件。 供應規劃程式可能應用當產生SPA表時所使用的過慮器 (filters)。例如,SPA表可能载明:某些行動類盤,或者與 某些項目類型有關的行動。過濾器只會修改拷貝到SPA表 的結果資料,但是不會影響到其它供應系統成份的操作’ 諸如:資源最佳化,產品變更分析,或比較操作;所有的 操作都是使用聯網表資料而不是SPA表之已過濾内容作為 輸入資訊。供應規劃程式200可能進一步將這些過濾器從 SPA表應用到供應規劃程式2〇〇報表。 在步驟230中所形成的供應計劃摘要報表會提供:來自 SPA表之資料摘要。供應規劃程式2〇〇摘要報表會提供一種 以概括性報表呈現之用戶操作的清晰描寫。對於報表選項 (report 0pti〇ns)對話框中所選擇的每項類別而言,定期地 (諸如··按月地)指示··採購,裝配,以及轉移零件投資。這 種供應計劃摘要報表會提供資訊,以便評估:在時段開= 和結束時的庫存水準,以及停滯在庫存中的資金金額。。 同樣地,供應計劃工令單行動報表會顯示··由供應規割 程式200選定行程所規劃的所有工令單(w〇)。w〇行動報 表疋明確地為規劃程式而設計。藉由使用報表輸出資訊, 規畫】程式就能夠瞭解:目前曰程表必須怎樣調整,以滿足 -48- 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(45 ) 關於裝配零件需求之需求量。各種報表選項容許規劃程式 選定特定資訊目標。藉由查看所有新的行動(或者計劃供應 訂單(或PSO)),規劃程式就能夠瞭解:是否有可能屨行新 增工令單。若PSO被除去,則會顯示現存工令單的清晰視 圖。藉由查看關於現存工令單的行動(諸如:下推,上拉, 或取消),規劃程式就能夠依照需要而重新排定工場工作 (shop wrok),進而嘗試識別能夠依照需要而重新排定工場 工作的規劃程式,以及嘗試識別無法滿足這些行動的地 方。 供應計劃採購單(PO)行動報表會顯示:由供應計劃行程 所建議的所有採購單或計劃供應訂單(PSO)。供應計劃PO 行動報表基本上是買方之工具。用戶能夠將供應計劃PO行 動只限於一特定買方,或者藉由包括所有買方而對情況有 一個全盤的認識。當查看包括PSO有的供應計劃PO行動 時,買方將會瞭解:應該考量哪些訂單以滿足需求之需求 量。若將PSO從供應計劃PO行動中除去,則只有採購單的 清晰視圖會呈現。根據這種供應計劃PO行動(其中將PSO除 去),買方能夠檢查(review):己經針對由供應規劃程式 200所建議的行動(諸如:下推,上拉,或取消)而發出的採 購單。若行動是可達成的,則買方隨後能夠嘗試使行動付 諸實施。 同樣地,供應計劃過剩存貨報表會顯示··來自載明供應 計劃行動表的整個終止可用庫存量。過剩存貨報表能夠提 供針對組織之存貨部位(inventory position)的有價值洞察 -49- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (44) When the supply is not enough to carry out the demand, it will be planned for a predetermined replacement part.] An alternative method. Supplies may be: existing inventory, purchase orders and work orders, or purchase orders. In the SPA table, there may be two types of supply planning cake 200 (SP) parts: SPS, which has a predetermined alternative supply, and SPD, which has one of the predetermined requirements arranged as a result. The supply planner may apply filters used when generating the SPA table. For example, the SPA list may specify: certain types of actions, or actions related to certain types of items. The filter will only modify the result data copied to the SPA table, but will not affect the operations of other supply system components' such as: resource optimization, product change analysis, or comparison operations; all operations use network table data and Not filtered content of the SPA table as input. The supply planner 200 may further apply these filters from the SPA table to the supply planner 200 report. The supply plan summary report formed in step 230 will provide: a summary of the data from the SPA form. The Supply Planner 2000 Summary Report will provide a clear description of user actions presented in a summary report. For each category selected in the report options (report 0pti〇ns) dialog box, periodically (such as by month) indicates purchasing, assembly, and transfer of parts investment. This supply plan summary report provides information for assessing: the level of inventory at the opening and closing times, and the amount of funds stuck in inventory. . Similarly, the supply plan work order action report will display all work order (w0) planned for the trip selected by the supply planning program 200. w〇 Action reports 疋 are explicitly designed for planning procedures. By using the report to output information, the planning] program can understand: how the current schedule must be adjusted to meet -48- 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (45) The demand for assembly parts. Various reporting options allow the planner to select specific information goals. By looking at all new actions (or planned supply orders (or PSOs)), the planner knows if it is possible to carry out new work orders. If the PSO is removed, a clear view of the existing work order is displayed. By looking at actions on existing work orders (such as: push down, pull up, or cancel), the planner can reschedule shop wrok as needed, and then try to identify if it can be rescheduled as needed Planning procedures for the work of the workshop, and attempts to identify where these actions cannot be met. The supply plan purchase order (PO) action report shows all purchase orders or planned supply orders (PSO) suggested by the supply plan itinerary. The supply plan PO action statement is basically a buyer's tool. The user can limit the supply plan PO action to a specific buyer, or have a holistic view of the situation by including all buyers. When looking at PO actions including supply plans that PSO has, buyers will understand: which orders should be considered to meet demand. If the PSO is removed from the supply planning PO action, only a clear view of the purchase order will be presented. Based on this supply plan PO action (where the PSO is removed), the buyer can review: purchase orders that have been issued for actions suggested by the supply planner 200 (such as: push down, pull up, or cancel) . If the action is achievable, the buyer can then attempt to implement the action. Similarly, the Supply Plan Excess Inventory Report will show the entire amount of discontinued available inventory from the Supply Plan Action Sheet. Excess inventory report can provide valuable insights into the inventory position of the organization -49- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071

力。在過剩存貨報表中,用戶可能想要檢查的首要資料 是:沒有PSO的過剩存貨。若在充分期限内檢查過剩部 位,則用戶將會瞭解:正在保有哪些具有挺低使用可能性 的項目。也許這種存貨當作一種產品的諸多較舊型號之代 替品是需要的。針對用戶檢查過剩存貨報表的另一方法可 犯包括PSO。藉由在充分期限内查看這種報表,用戶就能 夠瞭解··在一載明時段結束時,將會過剩的存貨;以及被 列表存貨將包括針對下一時段的預測。依序地,在作出關 於訂購政策的評估方面,用戶可能使用這種資訊。 另一種報表就是供應計劃缺料報表,它會顯示:呈現在 SPA表中,在供應規劃程式2〇〇中的零件短缺。供應計劃缺 料報表為物料和生產管制日程表之評估提供一種組織之缺 料量的抽點處理(snapshot)。不論多現場(muhi_site)還是 單現場(single-site),都能夠針對單一零件或所有零件,或 者針對一組選定規劃程式或買方而分析資料。以上描述的 ABC零件過濾器是缺料報表之一要素(element),因為它會 容許用戶驗證(verify)零件分類法的可行性(feasibiHty)以 及處理(address) —些問題,諸如:A類(class A)零件的短 缺是否為一時的或始終如此的事件,或者A類零件的不足前 置時間是否藉由減少A類零件之前置時間或說明增加的前置 時間來最佳處理。利用這種資訊,當進行各種模擬時,用 戶就能夠嘗試減少缺料量。 另一類型的報表是轉移訂單行動報表。轉移訂單行動報 表會顯不:由供應計劃所產生的所有現場間訂單。轉移訂force. In the excess inventory report, the primary data that the user may want to check is: excess inventory without PSO. If the excess is checked within a sufficient period, the user will know what items are being kept that have a very low probability of use. Perhaps this inventory is needed as a replacement for many older models of a product. Another method that can be used to check the excess inventory report for users includes PSO. By viewing such reports within a sufficient period, users can understand that, at the end of a specified period, there will be excess inventory; and the listed inventory will include forecasts for the next period. Sequentially, users may use this information in making assessments about ordering policies. Another report is the supply plan shortage report, which will show: the shortage of parts in the SPA table in the supply planner 2000. The supply plan missing report provides a snapshot of the organization's missing materials for the evaluation of materials and production control schedules. Whether multi-site (muhi_site) or single-site (single-site), data can be analyzed for a single part or all parts, or for a selected set of planners or buyers. The ABC part filter described above is an element of the missing material report because it will allow users to verify the feasibiHty of part taxonomy and address issues such as: Class A ( Class A) Whether the shortage of parts is a temporary or always such event, or whether the insufficient lead time of a Class A part is best dealt with by reducing the pre-position time of a Class A part or explaining the increased lead time. With this information, users can try to reduce the amount of material shortage when performing various simulations. Another type of report is the transfer order action report. The transfer order action report will show: all inter-site orders generated by the supply plan. Transfer order

裝 訂Binding

-50--50-

578071 A7 B7578071 A7 B7

單行動報表與PO行動和wo行動兩種報表有分類似,但是 卻將它用於多現場,其中:一個規劃程式可能對兩個現場 之間的規劃負有責任。該報表具有變通性(flexibility),以 便顯示共有諸如··下推,上拉,或取消之類行動的現場間 訂單’用來協助規劃程式對規劃日程表作出調整。然而, 該報表會容許:必要時,完全印出現場間訂單。 同樣地,供應計劃關鍵物料短缺報表會提供:一種用來 迅速地正確瞄準(pinpointing)可能會有短缺之零件的方 法。明確地說,供應系統1〇〇會報告··有關在一確定日期之 前就歷經短缺的那些零件。在用戶具有偶入訊息(gp :意外 的變更)和需要瞭解漏失(drops)是否會造成短缺的時候是特 別有用的。偶入訊息(drop-ins)包括下列幾項:純偶入訊 息,其中增加了新零件;變更目前到期曰,或一現存零件 之牽引(pulling-in)需求;以及增加〆現存零件的目前預定 數量。 用戶也可能形成一種聯網表(netting table)。特別是,主 生產曰程表(MPS)會執行在物料表(B〇M)中之多重階層的 分析。這種分析容許在每個階層處之呀用承諾(ATP)的可見 性(visibility ),並且保證針對每個項目而呈現所有的供應 和需求。MPS功能會提供:在獨立性需求階層處,按照單 一時段以及累積時段的可用承諾和預計可用資料。MPS也 包括·依照用戶請求的相依性需求項目。這種特點容許用 戶:執行在BOM上之多數階層處的MPS分析。MPS然後會 對用戶顯示在多數階層處的可用承諾項目,因而容許用The single action report is similar to the PO action and wo action reports, but it is used for multiple sites. One planner may be responsible for the planning between the two sites. This report has flexibility to show inter-site orders that have actions such as · push down, pull up, or cancel 'to assist the planning program to make adjustments to the planning schedule. However, the report will allow for full printing of inter-seat orders if necessary. Similarly, a supply plan critical material shortage report will provide a method for quickly and correctly pinpointing parts that may be in short supply. Specifically, the supply system 100 will report ... on those parts that have experienced shortages before a certain date. This is especially useful when users have occasional messages (gp: unexpected changes) and need to know if drops are causing shortages. Drop-ins include the following: purely sporadic messages with new parts added; changes to the current expiration date, or the pull-in demand for an existing part; and the increase Predetermined quantity. Users may also form a netting table. In particular, the master production schedule (MPS) performs multiple levels of analysis in the bill of materials (BOM). This analysis allows the use of ATP visibility at each level and guarantees that all supply and demand are presented for each project. The MPS function will provide: at the level of independence needs, according to the available commitments and estimated available data for a single period and cumulative period. The MPS also includes dependency requirements items based on user requests. This feature allows the user to perform MPS analysis at most levels on the BOM. MPS will then show the user's available commitments at most levels, thus allowing users to use

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(48 ) 戶:暸解針對每個MPS項目的供應和需求。MPS會基於一 種現存聯網表而執行其計算。現存聯網表可能是··由供應 規劃程式200所產生的預設(default)聯網表,或者用戶已經 獨立地產生和命名的一種聯網表。聯網表會將預測和客戶 訂單與供應圖像相比較,以確認供應/需求平衡。在查閱分 解式工令單和詳細零件規劃之前,打算在獨立性需求階層 處進行這種檢查。這種表會提供:按照時段的可用承諾資 訊,以及累積可用承諾計算。可用承諾是:一家公司之存 貨和計劃生產的未承諾部份,被維持在主日程表中,以支 援客戶訂單承諾。可用承諾數量是:在第一時段中的未承 諾存貨平衡和任何供應訂單,並且通常是針對每個時段加 以計算的,在時段中則排定MPS接收量。在第一時段中, 可用承諾會包括:現有存貨加上任何供應訂單,到期和過 期(overdue)的少量客戶訂單,直到下一供應時段為止。在 後續時段中,可用承諾會顯示··供應訂單的未承諾剩餘部 份,直到下一供應時段為止。 如以上描述的,供應系統100通常會使用標準APICS邏輯 於規劃資源配置中。用戶也可能載明與供應系統100—起使 用的供應配置優先序,步驟220。在一實施例中,供應系統 1〇〇具有用來確定供應配置優先序的三種主要邏輯選項:最 早可用供應品(Earliest Available Supplies),最佳適合供 應配置(Best Fit Supply Allocation)以及硬性供應配置 (Hard Supply Allocation)。按照預設,供應系統100通常 是使用最早可用供應品邏輯,其中:根據需求類型而排定 -52- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(49 ) 諸多獨立性需求的優先序。然後將相同類型的諸多獨立性 需求進一步按照到期曰來排定優先序(prioritized)。供應系 統100隨後會在滿足具有次高優先序的需求之前,將所有必 需物料配置到具有最高優先序的需求等等。當滿足一需求 時,供應系統100會按照下列順序來配置預定接收量:存 貨,工令單(Work Orders,簡稱W0),採購單(purchase Orders,簡稱P0),申購單(PR),以及計劃供應訂單 (PS0)。一旦已經將一既定零件的供應量配置到一需求,該 供應量就不再是可用於配置到任何其它的需求。將供應量 定位到需求,都是以一種先要求先遞補(fir st-re quire d, first-filled)為基礎。所有的供應規劃程式200訂單(新增訂 單,重新排程,以及取消)都要顧慮到。然而,這種方法並 不是適合於所有情況。例如,當與最早可用供應品邏輯搭 配時,縱使有時間製造或訂購談論中的零件,也會耗盡存 貨來滿足一需求。這樣會使存貨用盡,並且不能滿足:具 有較早到期日之較低優先序的任何其它需求。這些其它的 需求可能因此而延遲滿足。若換成是已經將存貨應用於它 們,則它們可能已經準時滿足。如以下描述的,其它兩種 滿足需求的方法(最佳適合供應配置和硬性供應配置)會處理 這種缺點。 為了處理上述問題,用戶可能選擇應用最佳適合供應配 置邏輯。與最早可用供應品邏輯相對照,最佳適合供應配 置邏輯將會配置:仍然會容許需求準時滿足的最遲(latest) 或最不可能(last-possible)可用供應品。最佳適合供應配置 -53- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7578071 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (48) Households: Understand the supply and demand for each MPS project. MPS performs its calculations based on an existing networking table. The existing networking table may be a default networking table generated by the supply planner 200, or a networking table that the user has independently generated and named. Networked tables compare forecasts and customer orders with supply images to confirm supply / demand balance. This inspection is intended to be performed at the level of independence requirements before reviewing disaggregated work orders and detailed part planning. This table provides: information on available commitments over time periods, and cumulative available commitments. Available commitments are: The uncommitted portion of a company's inventory and planned production is maintained in the master schedule to support customer order commitments. Available commitments are: uncommitted inventory balance and any supply orders during the first period, and are usually calculated for each period, and MPS reception is scheduled during the period. In the first period, the available commitments will include: existing inventory plus any supply orders, small customer orders due and overdue until the next supply period. In subsequent periods, the available commitments show the uncommitted remaining portion of the supply order until the next supply period. As described above, the provisioning system 100 typically uses standard APICS logic in planning resource allocation. The user may also specify the order of provisioning configuration used with the provisioning system 100, step 220. In one embodiment, the supply system 100 has three main logical options for prioritizing supply configuration: Earliest Available Supplies, Best Fit Supply Allocation, and Hard Supply Configuration (Hard Supply Allocation). According to the preset, the supply system 100 usually uses the earliest available supply logic, which is arranged according to the type of demand -52- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 mm) Invention Description (49) Priority of many independence requirements. Many independent requirements of the same type are then further prioritized according to expiration date. The supply system 100 then configures all required materials to the highest priority demand, and so on, before meeting the demand with the next highest priority. When a demand is met, the supply system 100 configures the scheduled receipts in the following order: inventory, work orders (W0), purchase orders (P0), purchase orders (PR), and plans Supply order (PS0). Once the supply of a given part has been allocated to a demand, that supply is no longer available for allocation to any other demand. Positioning supply to demand is based on a kind of fir-re-quire d (first-filled). All Supply Planner 200 orders (new orders, rescheduled, and cancelled) need to be considered. However, this approach is not suitable for all situations. For example, when paired with the earliest available supply logic, even if there is time to manufacture or order the part in question, it will also run out of inventory to meet a demand. This would run out of inventory and fail to meet: any other demand with a lower priority than the earlier due date. These other needs may be delayed as a result. If instead the inventory had been applied to them, they might have been met on time. As described below, the other two approaches to meeting demand (best-fit provisioning and hard provisioning configurations) address this shortcoming. To address these issues, the user may choose to apply the configuration logic that best fits the provisioning. In contrast to the earliest available supply logic, the best-fit supply configuration logic will be configured: the latest or last-possible available supply that will still allow demand to be met on time. Best suitable supply configuration -53- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7

邏輯會以不同的方式來處理諸多需求。端視需求是否在或 不在累積前置時間内而定,RESO 3 00將會配置一預定接收 量(最遲的一個);並且,若沒有預定接收量存在以滿足需 求,則只會配置一計劃訂單作為最後之手段(last res〇n)。 在另方面’若需求不在前置時間内,則供應系統1 〇 〇將會 配置滿足需求的最遲或最不可能供應品,而不管它是預定 接收量(包括存貨)還是計劃訂單。供應系統100通常會以和 組裝與轉移零件不同的方式來處理採購零件。就採購零件 而a ’使用採購前置時間(pUrchase lead-time);而對轉移 與組裝零件而言,則使用累積前置時間(cumulative lead-time)。再者,供應系統100可能以和組裝與轉移零件不同 的方式來處理採購零件。就採購零件而言,供應系統1〇〇可 月b使用採購前置時間;而對轉移與組裝零件而言,則使用 不積則置時間。供應系統1〇〇也可能以和組裝與轉移零件不 同的方式來處理採購零件。在一建構例中,只有採購前置 時間被用來評估採購零件之可用性。然而,供應系統1〇〇之 一較佳實施例會進一步考量:在已陳述前置時間計劃之 外’針對採購零件的預定接收量。此外,就需要日期或前 置時間而言’不管哪一個比較大,供應系統1〇〇都可能安排 適於PSO的計劃訂單。這種前置時間計算是與只使用累積 月’J置時間的轉移與組裝零件相對照。於是,最佳適合供應 配置邏輯不像最早可用供應品方法那樣,它不會容許使存 ^用盡’因而使存貨最佳地應用於需要它的那些需求。同 樣地’若有一種能夠滿足需求的較低優先序,則不會消耗 -54 - 本纸張尺度適用中S S家標準(CNS) A4規格(21G χ 297公董)Logic handles many needs in different ways. Depending on whether the demand is in or out of the accumulation lead time, RESO 3 00 will be configured with a predetermined reception amount (the latest one); and if no predetermined reception amount exists to meet the demand, only a plan will be configured Orders are used as a last resort. On the other hand, if the demand is not within the lead time, the supply system 100 will configure the latest or least likely supply to meet the demand, regardless of whether it is a scheduled receipt (including inventory) or a planned order. The supply system 100 typically processes purchased parts in a different way from assembling and transferring parts. For the procurement of parts, a 'uses the procurement lead-time; for transfer and assembly parts, the cumulative lead-time is used. Furthermore, the supply system 100 may process purchased parts in a different way than assembling and transferring parts. For purchasing parts, the supply system can use procurement lead time of 100 months; for transferring and assembling parts, use the non-accumulated time. The supply system 100 may also handle purchased parts in a different way than assembly and transfer parts. In one construction example, only lead time for procurement is used to assess the availability of purchased parts. However, a preferred embodiment of the supply system 100 will further consider: the scheduled receipt of purchased parts in addition to the stated lead time plan. In addition, in terms of the required date or advance time, ’no matter which is larger, the supply system 100 may arrange a planned order suitable for PSO. This lead time calculation is in contrast to shifting and assembling parts using only cumulative month'J set time. Thus, the best fit supply configuration logic, unlike the earliest available supply method, does not allow the inventory to be used up 'and thus optimally applies the inventory to those needs that require it. Similarly, if there is a lower priority that can meet the demand, it will not be consumed.

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 __B7 五、發明説明(51 ) — 任何其它的預定接收量。 兩者擇一地,供應系統100可能使用··按照類型來排定優 先序的硬性供應配置邏輯。如以上描述的,傳統最早可用 供應品方法是:按照需求類型來排定諸多獨立性需求的優 先序,然後將相同類型的諸多獨立性需求進一步按照到期 日來排定優先序。相對照下,硬性供應配置方法只是按照 類型來排定優先序,因而將相同類型的所有需求都視為相 等。在一類型内,不管頂層(top_level)產品的到期曰如 何,供應系統100會將諸多組件之零件配置到最先需要它們 的需求。換言之,因為供應系統100會考慮累積前置時間和 配置供應品,所以具有長前置時間的那些產品都會準時得 到它們需要的零件。與可能用盡存貨來滿足具有最早到期 日之需求的最早可用供應品方法相對照,硬性供應配置邏 輯會將存貨配置到··其產品具有累積前置時間如此長以致 於匕們無法藉由其它預定接收量或計劃訂單來滿足的那些 需求。於是,硬性供應配置邏輯可能增加:所有需求都能 夠準時滿足的機會。 適於供應視劃程式的數學模划 在一建構例中,供應規劃程式2〇〇會使用下列數學模型而 操作。在這種數學模型中,諸多規劃決策變數包括:578071 A7 __B7 V. Description of the Invention (51) — Any other scheduled receipt. Alternatively, the supply system 100 may use a hard supply configuration logic that prioritizes by type. As described above, the traditional earliest available supply method is to prioritize many independent needs according to the type of demand, and then to prioritize many independent needs of the same type according to the due date. In contrast, the hard-supply allocation method simply prioritizes by type, so all demand of the same type is considered equal. Within a type, regardless of the expiration of the top-level product, the supply system 100 will configure the components of many components to the needs that require them first. In other words, because the supply system 100 considers accumulated lead times and configures supplies, those products with long lead times will get the parts they need on time. In contrast to the earliest available supply method that may run out of inventory to meet the demand with the earliest expiration date, the hard supply configuration logic will allocate the inventory to ... its products have a cumulative lead time so long that the Other scheduled receipts or planned orders to meet those needs. As a result, the hard provisioning logic may increase: the opportunity for all demand to be met on time. Mathematical Modeling Suitable for Supply Visualization Programs In a construction example, the supply planning program 2000 will operate using the following mathematical model. In this mathematical model, many planning decision variables include:

Xit=在時段t中所裝運的部份需求i ; 在時段t中所建立的部份工令單k;Xit = part of the demand i shipped during time period t; part of the work order k established during time period t;

Ijt=在時段t結束時之項目j的庫存量; PJt-在時段t中之項目j的產量(即··針對組裝項目的新工令 -55- 本紙張尺度適財關家標準(CNS) M規格(21Qx挪公爱)---- 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(52 ) 單,針對採購項目的新採購單);Ijt = the inventory of item j at the end of time period t; PJt-the output of item j in time period t M specification (21Qx), 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (52), new purchase order for purchase items);

Wjkt=在時段t中,用來建立工令單k之項目j的撤回量 (withdrawal);Wjkt = Withdrawal of item j used to establish work order k during period t;

Ujkt=在時段t中,用來建立工令單k之項目j的自由使用量 (即:發放存貨的使用量)。 此外,使用下列變數,將一些獨立性需求定義於數學模 型中: 山尸由需求i所要求之項目j的數量; ai =與需求i有關聯的收益(revenue); 1 =與需求i有關聯的盈利(margin); M =獨立性需求數目。 就一既定需求i而言,針對唯一的項目j,dij才是非零的。若 想要將一組獨立性需求視為單一群組(Single group),則產 生一人造母項目(artificial parent item)和組成此人造項目 之獨立性需求子項目(children)的集合。 同樣地,使用這些變數,將諸多相依性需求定義於數學 模型中: qij =每組裝項目i所要求之項目j的數量;Ujkt = The free usage of item j used to establish work order k during period t (that is, the usage of issued inventory). In addition, the following variables are used to define some independent requirements in the mathematical model: the number of items j required by the mountain i by the requirement i; ai = revenue associated with the requirement i; 1 = associated with the requirement i Profit; M = number of independent needs. For a given demand i, dij is non-zero for the only item j. If we want to treat a group of independent requirements as a single group, we will generate an artificial parent item and a set of independent requirement children that make up the artificial item. Similarly, using these variables, many dependencies are defined in the mathematical model: qij = number of items j required for each assembly item i;

Sj =要求項目j之組裝項目的集合。 每組裝品需要量qij應該已經反映組合,損耗率以及良率調 整。 藉由下列變數來表示預定工令單:Sj = set of assembly items requiring item j. The amount of qij required for each assembly should already reflect the combination, wear rate, and yield adjustment. The scheduled work order is represented by the following variables:

Sjk二由工令單k所供應之項目j的數量; ajk=針對工令單k之項目j的實際需求量; -56- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(53 ) tjk=已經針對工令單k而發於(或”裝備")之項目』的數量; LTk=針對工令單k的前置時間; W=工令單數目; A尸具有針對項目j之實際需求量的工令單之集合。 注意··就一既定工令單k而言,針對一個以上的項目j 可能是非零的。這等於說··一份工令單可能供應一個以上 的項目。 再者,使用下列變數來定義採購單和申購單: rJmt=在時段t中,由採購單/申購單m所供應之項目』的數 量; P =採購單和申購單數目; =針對項目j之採購單和申購單的集合;其它項目約束則 日 · 疋· LTj-針對組裝項目j的固定或平均組裝前置時間;Sjk 2 The number of item j supplied by the work order k; ajk = the actual demand for item j for the work order k; -56- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) ) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (53) tjk = Number of items that have been issued (or “equipment”) for work order k; LTk = Lead time for work order k; W = Work The number of orders; A has a collection of work orders for the actual demand for item j. Note ... For a given work order k, it may be non-zero for more than one item j. This is equivalent to saying ... A work order may supply more than one item. Furthermore, the following variables are used to define purchase orders and purchase orders: rJmt = Number of items supplied by purchase order / purchase order m during period t; P = Number of purchase orders and purchase orders; = The set of purchase orders and purchase orders for item j; other project constraints days · 疋 · LTj-fixed or average assembly lead time for assembly item j;

Cj =項目j的標準成本; N=約束項目之數目。 注意:LTj是針對組裝項目j的固定或平均組裝前置時間。 若一個項目之前置時間是可變的,則將平均前置時間加以 計算成為:可變前置時間分量乘以標準批量大小,加上固 定前置時間分量。也要注意:LTk是針對工令單}^的前置時 間’而LT』·則是針對組裝項目j的固定或平均組裝前置時 間右谷許預疋工令單具有與新工令單不同的前置時間並 不是挺重要的’則可能以針對由工令單k所供應之最重要項 目j的前置時間LTj來代替LTk。 -57-Cj = standard cost of item j; N = number of constrained items. Note: LTj is a fixed or average assembly lead time for assembly item j. If the preceding time of an item is variable, the average lead time is calculated as: the variable lead time component is multiplied by the standard batch size, plus the fixed lead time component. It should also be noted that LTk is the lead time for work order} ^ and LT ”· is a fixed or average assembly lead time for assembly item j The lead time of is not very important, then LTk may be replaced by the lead time LTj for the most important item j supplied by the work order k. -57-

578071578071

使用這些變數來定義各種設施(工作中心): bnt=在時段t中,工作中心n之產能(capachy); gjn =在工作中心η處,用來處理項目j所需的可變時間; hjn=在工作中心11處,用來處理項目』所需的固定時間; Ο工作中心的總數。 產能bnt可能藉由一個負載因數(1〇ad fact〇〇來調整,以便Use these variables to define various facilities (work centers): bnt = capacity of work center n during period t; gjn = variable time required to process item j at work center η; hjn = At work center 11, fixed time required to process the project; 0 Total number of work centers. Capacity bnt may be adjusted by a load factor (10ad fact〇〇)

表達:工作中心η的淨產能,較少維護和修復停機時間 (downtime)等。 一個最後的約束是: 時段數目。 裝 訂Expression: Net capacity of work center η, less maintenance and repair downtime, etc. One final constraint is: the number of periods. Binding

現在將要描述:使用以上所引進的變數來定義的約束。 方程式1表示:庫存平衡(inventory Balance),並且通常 是主要物料約束。它會追踪庫存添加量(additions)和撤回 量,並且保證:在任何時段中,每個項目的庫存量都不會 變成負的。在右側之最先的四項表示四種庫存供應量··來 自先前時段的庫存,在此時段中的新供應品(即:新採購 單’新工令單),在此時段中所建立的預定工令單數量,以 及在此時段中到達的預定採購單和申購單。而最後的三個 總和項(Summations,Σ)則表示三種庫存撤回量:在此時 #又中所裝運的需求,由於在稍後時段中之新工令單的組裝 而產生的撤回量,以及由於在稍後時段中之預定工令單的 組裝而產生的撤回量。 -58- 本纸银尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(55 ) β W Ρ :Ι,'+Ρβ+异 ~X4/;C/r -‘ ^ 一 妒认Γ· (方程式1) 在時段1中,將在右側之首項(Ijn)設定為初始現有庫存 量。 注意:ykt變數容許供應規劃程式200下推,上拉,取 消,或分割工令單。因為採購單和申購單都沒有一個對應 的變數集合,所以用戶無法改變這些預定接收量。對於排 定要對採購單和申購單採取行動而言,隨後會產生針對這 些預定接收量之一附加的變數集合。 在方程式2中所表示的獨立性需求約束,保證:已裝運 (或者是完成或製造)的每個獨立性需求之數量最多是需求的 數量。注意:由於這些約束都是不等式(inequalities),而 不是等式;故而它們允許某些獨立性需求不會被完成的可 能性。 ^x, < IV;Λ/. ,=1 (方程式2) 在方程式2中,時段t指示:其中需求被裝運的時段。 就像以上陳述它們的那樣,這些約束(方程式1和2)都會 採取橫跨整個規劃期限(planning horizon)的總和項,於是 容許:在規劃期限期間,需求隨時會被完成的可能性。為 -59- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐)We will now describe the constraints defined using the variables introduced above. Equation 1 represents: inventory balance, and is usually a major material constraint. It tracks inventory additions and withdrawals, and guarantees that the inventory of each item will not become negative at any time. The first four items on the right represent the four types of inventory supply. Inventory from the previous period, new supplies in this period (ie: new purchase order 'new work order), The number of scheduled work orders, as well as the scheduled purchase orders and purchase orders that arrived during this period. And the last three summation items (Summations, Σ) represent three types of inventory withdrawals: the demand shipped at this time # Youzhong, the withdrawal amount due to the assembly of new work orders in a later period, and The amount of withdrawal due to the assembly of a predetermined work order in a later period. -58- The silver scale of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297, 578071, A7, B7) V. Description of the invention (55) β W Ρ: 1, '+ Ρβ + 异 ~ X4 /; C / r-' ^ I envy Γ (Equation 1) In period 1, set the first item (Ijn) on the right as the initial existing inventory. Note: The ykt variable allows the supply planner 200 to push down, pull up, cancel, or divide Work order. Because neither the purchase order nor the purchase order has a corresponding set of variables, the user cannot change these scheduled receipts. For scheduling actions to be taken on purchase orders and purchase orders, subsequent scheduled receipts will be generated One of the additional set of variables. The independence requirement constraint expressed in Equation 2 guarantees that the number of each independent requirement that is shipped (or completed or manufactured) is at most the number of requirements. Note: Because these constraints are Are inequalities, not equality; therefore they allow the possibility that some independence requirements will not be fulfilled. ^ X, <IV; Λ /., = 1 (Equation 2) In Equation 2, the time period t indicates: where demand is The time period of shipment. As stated above, these constraints (Equations 1 and 2) take the sum of terms across the entire planning horizon, thus allowing: during the planning period, demand may be fulfilled at any time. -59- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7五、發明説明(56 ) 了限制其中能夠完成一既定需求I的時段,就應該將總和項 限制在規劃期限期間之一特定時窗(window),即:總和項 應該在大於1的某個時段開始,而在小於T的某個時段結 束。此時窗能夠取決於針對需求需要日期。譬如說,假定 一需求是定於時段14中完成。為了裝運需求達到提早3個時 段和延後4個時段,總和項就應該包括從t = 14 - 3 = 11到 t = 14 + 4 = 18 〇 獨立性需求約束的結構會假定:大多數的獨立性需求都 必須被完全裝運(shipped complete),但是約束卻都適應 於必須被完全裝運的需求和允許部份裝運(partial shipments)的需求。對於必須被完全裝運(即:在一項裝運 中)的需求I而言,針對所有時段,Xit應該被約束成為一種 二進制變數(binary variable): U (方程式3) 就允許部份裝運的需求I而言,xit不應該被約束成為一種二 進制;但是在供應規劃程式200中,所有的xit變數通常都會 被束成為二進制。 另一種類型的約束就是預定工令單約束,它會保證:用 戶最多建立每份工令單的規定量(specified quantity)。注 意:因為這些約束都是不等式,所以它們允許用戶建造少 於規定量的可能性。578071 A7 B7 V. The description of the invention (56) restricts the period in which a given demand I can be completed, the total term should be limited to a specific window during the planning period, that is: the total term should be greater than A certain period starts and ends at a period less than T. This window can depend on the date required for the demand. For example, suppose a demand is scheduled to be completed in period 14. In order for the shipping demand to reach 3 periods earlier and 4 periods delayed, the summation term should include from t = 14-3 = 11 to t = 14 + 4 = 18 〇 The structure of the independence requirement constraint assumes: most of the independence Sexual requirements must be shipped complete, but constraints are adapted to the requirements that must be fully shipped and the need to allow partial shipments. For demand I, which must be fully shipped (ie, in a shipment), Xit should be constrained to a binary variable for all time periods: U (Equation 3) allows demand for partial shipments I In terms of xit, it should not be constrained to a binary; but in the supply planner 200, all xit variables are usually bundled into a binary. Another type of constraint is a predetermined work order constraint, which guarantees that the user can establish up to a specified quantity of each work order. Note: Because these constraints are inequalities, they allow the user to build fewer than the specified amount of possibilities.

裝 訂Binding

線 -60- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(57 )Line -60- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (57)

Xh幺⑼=1,尺,『 (方程式4) 在方程式4中,時段t現在顯示:其中完成工令單數量的時 段。 預定工令單約束與獨立性需求約束類似,於是容許類似 變通性。為了限制其中能夠建立一份工令單的時段,就應 該將總和項限制在一特定時窗,它或許是取決於針對工令 單之原始預定完成日期。對於無法分割的工令單k而言,針 對所有時段,ykt應該被約束為一種二進制變數: (方程式5) 就能夠分割的工令單k而言,ykt不應該被約束成為一種二進 制變數。 另一種類型的約束就是:實際需求量平衡(Actual Requirements Balance)以及撤回量與自由使用量限制 (Withdrawal and Free Usage Limits);它們一起保證: 從庫存中撤回針對工令單的正確實際需求量。將實際需求 量平衡陳述如下: ujia+wjkt=ajkykyj=x,K,N,,k=\,K,w.,t 二\,κ,τ· (方程式6) -61 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐)Xh 幺 ⑼ = 1, ruler, "(Equation 4) In Equation 4, the time period t now shows: the time period in which the number of work orders was completed. The scheduled work order constraints are similar to the independent demand constraints, and thus allow for similar flexibility. In order to limit the period during which a work order can be established, the summation should be limited to a specific time window, which may depend on the original scheduled completion date for the work order. For work order k that cannot be divided, ykt should be constrained to a binary variable for all periods: (Equation 5) For work order k that can be divided, ykt should not be constrained to be a binary variable. Another type of constraint is: Actual Requirements Balance and Withdrawal and Free Usage Limits; together they guarantee: Withdraw the correct actual demand for work orders from inventory. State the actual demand balance as follows: ujia + wjkt = ajkykyj = x, K, N ,, k = \, K, w., T two \, κ, τ (Equation 6) -61-This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

k 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(58 撤回量與自由使用量限制約束看起來像這樣·· j:wjk(<ajkykyj = lK,N;k^lK.W^ /=1 f^jk,tjk\fj = \,K,N;k = \,K,W· (方程式7和8) 只際需求量平衡約束陳述的是:針對在時段^;中的工令單k 之項目j的自由使用量和撤回量必須等於針對在時段t中實際 上建立的工令單k之總實際需求量的一部份。回量限制約束 會保證:總撤回量不會超過針對工令單!^而委託上拉之項目 j的數量;而自由使用量限制約束則保證··總自由使用量不 會超過針對工令單k而已經發放之項目j的數量。 決策變數Pjt會顯示:在時段t中產生之項目j的數量。若項 目j是採購項目,則Pjt對應於新採購單;若項目』是組裝項 目,則Pjt對應於新工令單。根據建立模型(modeling)觀 點,採購項目與組裝項目之間的唯一差別是··在這些子項 目必須從庫存中撤回時,與一組裝項目j有關聯的產量變數 Ρ”會出現在子項目的庫存平衡約束中。就每個項目j而言, 為了保證新供應品在已經過了前置時間之前不會到達,對 於U於别置時間的諸多時段而言,決策變數ρ。應該不會存 在。譬如說,假定一採購項目具有“天的前置時間,對於 諸多時段t=l,K,i9而言,Pjt應該不會存在(另—種實施時段 ^方式,則是將它們的數值固定在〇處卜就組裝項目而 言’有關的前置時間是組裝前置時間,而不是累積前置時k 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (58 Withdrawal limit and free usage limit constraints look like this: j: wjk (< ajkykyj = lK, N; k ^ lK.W ^ / = 1 f ^ jk, tjk \ fj = \, K, N; k = \, K, W · (Equations 7 and 8) The demand-only balance constraint states: for the free use of item j of work order k in period ^; The amount and the withdrawal amount must be equal to a part of the total actual demand for the work order k actually established during the period t. The return limit constraint will ensure that the total withdrawal amount will not exceed the commission for the work order! ^ The number of pull-up items j; and the restriction of free use guarantees that the total free use will not exceed the number of items j that have been issued for the work order k. The decision variable Pjt will show that: The number of item j. If item j is a purchase item, then Pjt corresponds to a new purchase order; if item "is an assembly item, then Pjt corresponds to a new work order. According to the modeling perspective, the purchase item and the assembly item The only difference is that when these sub-items must be withdrawn from inventory The associated output variable P "will appear in the inventory balance constraint of the sub-item. For each item j, in order to ensure that the new supply will not arrive before the lead time has passed, for U at another time For many time periods, the decision variable ρ. Should not exist. For example, suppose a purchase item has a "day lead time. For many time periods t = l, K, i9, Pjt should not exist (other- One implementation period ^ is to fix their values at 0. For the assembly project, the relevant lead time is the assembly lead time, not the cumulative lead time.

裝 訂Binding

-62--62-

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(59 ) 間。 製造一組裝項目j,一般說來需要按照一特定順序來完成 一連串的操作。為了容許必要變通性,以便在必須完成它 之前就開始將一項目製造得很好;用戶可能會針對在途程 (routing)中的每項操作(最後一項除外)而產生一些人造項 目(artificial items)。考慮具有4項途程操作(routing operations)之一項目A。就途程操作1到3而言,會產生3個 人造項目,將它們稱為·· Al,A2,以及A3。原始項目A的 子項目(children)都變成A1的子項目;A1是A2的唯一子項 目(only child) ;A2是A3的唯一子項目;而A3則是A唯一 子項目。最後的途程操作對應於原始項目A。以此方式,項 目A的母項目(parents)都會繼續指明項目A作為它們的子項 目,而生產這些母項目則會導致從已完成項目A之庫存中撤 回。 針對原始項目A的工令單必須變成針對項目A1的工令 單,人造項目對應於第一途程步驟。建立針對A1的工令單 會導致:從工令單之實際需求量中撤回,如果有的話;或 者從A1之子項目中撤回,如果工令單必須被展開的話。由 工令單所產生之A1的供應品,隨後藉由生產在途程中之下 一人造項目的A2而可供撤回。 用戶必須確定針對每個人造項目的組裝前置時間。若原 始項目之組裝前置時間是可變的,則這種計算是挺簡單 的:用戶使用針對每項途程操作的可變時間乘以標準批量 大小,加上針對每項途程操作的固定時間;並且將此數量 -63- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (59). Manufacturing an assembly item j generally requires a series of operations to be performed in a specific order. In order to allow the necessary flexibility so that an item can be made well before it must be completed; the user may generate artificial items for each operation (except the last one) in the routing ). Consider item A, which has one of four routing operations. For range operations 1 to 3, there will be 3 man-made items, which are called ... Al, A2, and A3. The children of the original project A all become children of A1; A1 is the only child of A2 (only child); A2 is the only child of A3; and A3 is the only child of A. The last trip operation corresponds to the original item A. In this way, the parents of item A will continue to specify item A as their child item, and the production of these parent items will result in withdrawal from the inventory of completed item A. The work order for the original item A must be changed to the work order for item A1. The man-made item corresponds to the first journey step. Establishing a work order for A1 will result in: withdrawal from the actual demand for the work order, if any; or withdrawal from the sub-items of A1, if the work order must be expanded. The supply of A1 produced by the work order is then available for withdrawal by producing A2 of the next man-made item on the way. The user must determine the assembly lead time for each man-made item. If the assembly lead time of the original project is variable, this calculation is quite simple: the user uses the variable time for each trip operation multiplied by the standard batch size, plus the fixed time for each trip operation; And this quantity -63- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(6〇 ) 加以上約整為最接近的整數。若原始項目之組裝前置時間 是固定的,則用戶將它分配遍及人造項目,使得⑴它們的 個別組裝前置時間會反映由每項流程操作所需要 時間的-部份,以及⑺㈣組裝前置時間的總:於 始組裝前置時間。這兩種目標有時會衝突,尤其= 組裝前置時間挺短的時候。 原始 下列演算法(alg〇rithm)给予—種用來計 之前置時間的可能方法: T人&項定前置時間的總和)/(針對所有途:操有 時間的總和)。在其它情況,則是 之了楚别置 (Item Master table)中的標準批量大小。於主項目表2Π2:’將途程操作之可變時間乘以標 定前置時間。將此數量加以上 約整為取接近的天數。此數值就是:針對每個 目的組裝前置時間;而對於最後的途程操作而言,」 就是針對原始項目的修訂後組裝前置時間。 匕 3·(任選)施加一個調整量(adjustment),使得:諸夕 造項目之前置時間的總和與原始組裝前置時間形^ 理的匹配。 若在步驟2中的約整操作(rounding)增加太多時間,則步 3可能是必需的。譬如說ϋ程具有四個㈣持續時^ 的操作,則三個人造項目中的每個人造項目都分到至少— 2. -64- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家襟準(CNS) Α4規格(21〇χ297公釐) § 裝 訂 線 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(61 ) 天的前置時間,而原始項目則分到至少一天的修訂後前置 時間。因此得到的總前置時間就是四天。但是,若原始組 裝前置時間只有一天分給第一人造項目,則分給其它人造 項目的前置時間為0。 下列虛擬碼(pseudocode)演算法摘要了針對具有多步驟 途程的每個項目而產生一些人造項目: 1. 針對每項途程操作(最後一項除外)而產生一個人造 項目。 2. 將原始項目之諸多子項目拷貝到針對第一途程操作 之人造項目的子項目陣列(child array)。 3. 以指向針對最後第二途程步驟之人造項目的單一子 項目來代替原始項目之諸多子項目。 4. 向後繼續進行遍及途程,使得針對途程操作η的人造 項目成為針對途程操作η+1之人造項目的一個子項 5· 將包括實際需求量的原始項目之工令單資訊移到針 對第一途程操作的人造項目。 6. 使用以上所給予的演算法來計算:針對人造項目的 組裝前置時間和針對原始項目的修訂後前置時間。 雖有產生這些人造項目,用戶仍以常用方式來建立庫存 平衡約束。現在,唯一的問題是··如何構築產能約束。要 答覆這個問題,供應會說明每項途程操作之固定時間。用 戶不是能夠引進另一組決策變數加以(幾乎)精確地說明固定 組裝時間,就是能夠求出每個工作中心花費在整備(set-up) -65- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (60) Add the above rounding to the nearest whole number. If the assembly lead time of the original project is fixed, the user will assign it throughout the artificial project, so that their individual assembly lead time will reflect the-part of the time required for each process operation, and Total time: lead time at the beginning of assembly. These two goals sometimes conflict, especially when the assembly lead time is short. Originally the following algorithm (algorithm) gives-a possible method to count the pre-set time: T person & item sum of the lead time) / (for all ways: the sum of the operating time). In other cases, it is the standard batch size in the Item Master table. In the main item table 2Π2: ', multiply the variable time of the trip operation by the calibration lead time. Round this number to the nearest number of days. This value is: the assembly lead time for each purpose; for the final journey operation, "" is the revised assembly lead time for the original project. Dagger 3 (optional) applies an adjustment so that: the sum of the pre-set time of the Zhuxi project and the original assembly lead time structure match. If rounding in step 2 adds too much time, step 3 may be necessary. For example, if the process has four operations with a duration of ^, then each of the three artificial items is assigned at least — 2. -64- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specifications ( 21〇χ297 mm) § Gutter 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (61) days lead time, while the original item is assigned a revised lead time of at least one day. So the total lead time is four days. However, if the lead time of the original assembly is only one day allocated to the first man-made item, the lead time allocated to other man-made items is zero. The following pseudocode algorithm summarizes some artificial items generated for each item with a multi-step process: 1. Generates an artificial item for each process operation (except the last item). 2. Copy many sub-items of the original project to the child array of man-made items for the first pass operation. 3. Replace many sub-projects of the original project with a single sub-project that points to the man-made project for the last second journey step. 4. Continue backwards throughout the journey, making the man-made item for the course operation η a sub-item of the man-made item for the course operation η + 1 Man-made items for journey operations. 6. Calculate using the algorithm given above: assembly lead time for man-made items and revised lead time for original items. Despite the creation of these artifacts, users still establish inventory balance constraints in the usual way. The only question now is how to build capacity constraints. To answer this question, the supply will specify a fixed time for each trip operation. The user can either introduce another set of decision variables to (almost) accurately specify the fixed assembly time, or be able to find the set-up cost of each work center Specifications (210X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

A7 B7 五、發明説明(62 ) 換式(或者消耗每生產批量固定時間的其它模式)中 分率的近似值。 若用戶引進另一組決策變數,則ejnt應該被定義如下: (方程式9) 泛如果工作中心n在時段t中處理項目j的話 加—ί〇在其它情況 為了保證:只有當工作中心η在時段t中處理項目」·時,勺以才 是非零的;就會施加下列約束: 』 ejnt ^ gjn \p jt +Σ ] V/ = 1, = = 1, Λ:,Γ k=i (方程式10) 以及 y/ = i,尺,❼=1,尺,c;,= 1,尺,r· k=\ (方程式11) 注意:若項目j是一個人造項目,它不是對應於某途程中的 第一操作,而是對應於與第一操作不同的某個操作;則上 述約束應該沒有關於Wjkt的總和項。第一組約束會保證·· ejnt=〇,如果關於工作中心n的時段t中並沒有生產項目j的 活。第二組約束則會保證:ejnt=1,如果關於工作中心η在 時段t中有生產項目j的話。第一組約束的定標操作(Scaiing) 會假疋·產月b資源單位(capacity res〇urce units)都是夠大 的因此生產一個或更多項目單位(item units)就會消耗一 個或更多產能資源單位。在其它情況,慼該將第一組約束 -66- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五 發明説明(63 ) 的右側乘以一個足夠大的定標因數(Scaling factor),以保 證:每當生產量都是嚴格正的(Strictly positive)時候,右 側之數值總是大於1。由於總產能可用性提供適當的上界 (upper bound),故而已經適當地定標了第二組約束。 在方程式12中,現在能夠將製造產能約束陳述如下: Y,Sjn[pjt <bnyn = lK,C;t = lK,T. j~\ k = \ j-\ (方程式12) 設定如方程式9到12中所描述的ejnt變數,意謂著:整備時 間(set-up-time)不是被估計不足(underestimated),而是 可能估計過高(overestimated);這是因為··在關於工作中 心η之用戶製造項目j的每時段中都會招致整備時間。但 是,若一個批量的項目j跨過關於工作中心η之一個以上的 時段;則整條時間只是包括在針對該批量的第一時段中, 而不是在諸多後續時段中。整備時間的這種潛在估計過 高,意謂著:供應可能使諸多產能資源稍微排程不足 (underschedule);但是,供應規劃程式200卻不會使它們 排程過度(overschedule)。 若用戶換成是決定求出固定組裝時間近似值,則用戶只 需要將bnt減少一個數量,該數量對於工作中心n花費在整備 模式中的時間百分率。若將此縮減產能表示為b3nt,則能夠 將製造約束加以陳述像這個樣子: -67- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐)A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (62) The approximate value of the fraction in the conversion formula (or other modes that consume a fixed time per production batch). If the user introduces another set of decision variables, ejnt should be defined as follows: (Equation 9) Generally, if work center n processes item j in time period t, add —ί〇 In other cases, to ensure that: only when work center n is in time period When processing items in t ", the spoon is non-zero; the following constraints are imposed:" ejnt ^ gjn \ p jt + Σ] V / = 1, = = 1, Λ :, Γ k = i (Equation 10 ) And y / = i, ruler, ❼ = 1, ruler, c ;, = 1, ruler, r · k = \ (Equation 11) Note: If item j is an artificial item, it does not correspond to a certain journey The first operation corresponds to a different operation from the first operation; then the above constraint should not have a total term for Wjkt. The first set of constraints will guarantee that ejnt = 0, if there is no activity of producing item j in period t with respect to work center n. The second set of constraints will ensure that ejnt = 1, if there is a production item j for work center η in period t. The first set of constraints for the calibration operation (Scaiing) will be false. · The monthly production resource units (capacity res〇urce units) are large enough so that the production of one or more item units will consume one or more Multi-capacity resource unit. In other cases, I should multiply the first set of constraints -66- this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 five invention instructions (63) multiplied by a large enough fixed Scaling factor to ensure that whenever the production volume is strictly positive, the value on the right is always greater than 1. Since the total capacity availability provides an appropriate upper bound, the second set of constraints has been properly scaled. In Equation 12, the manufacturing capacity constraint can now be stated as follows: Y, Sjn [pjt < bnyn = lK, C; t = lK, T. J ~ \ k = \ j- \ (Equation 12) Set as Equation 9 The ejnt variable described in 12 means that: set-up-time is not underestimated, but may be overestimated; this is because ... in the work center η The user-made item j incurs a settling time in each period. However, if a batch of items j spans more than one period with respect to work center η; the entire time is only included in the first period for the batch, and not in many subsequent periods. This potential overestimation of turnaround time means that supply may undereschedule many capacity resources slightly; however, the supply planner 200 does not overschedule them. If the user instead decides to obtain an approximate fixed assembly time value, the user only needs to reduce bnt by an amount, which is a percentage of the time spent by work center n in the maintenance mode. If this reduced capacity is expressed as b3nt, the manufacturing constraints can be stated like this: -67- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(64 ) \,K,C.,t = \,κ,τ· (方程式13) y r F Ί ^Σ§ρ\ρβ + y=i ^=1578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (64) \, K, C., t = \, κ, τ · (Equation 13) y r F Ί ^ Σ§ρ \ ρβ + y = i ^ = 1

目標函數(objective function)會組合四個目標(goals):最 大客戶服務(maximize customer service),最大化收益, 最大化盈利,以及最小化存貨成本(minimize inventory cost)。用戶們能夠將這四個目標賦予(assign)不同的權重 (weights),端視他們的公司目標而定。 裝 在衡量客戶服務(measuring customer service)方面,用 戶可能希望給予:準時裝運訂單對延後或提早裝運它們的 優先選擇(preference)。要這麼做,用戶利用一個表示為ait 的數值因數(value factor)來定標Xit :The objective function combines four goals: maximizing customer service, maximizing revenue, maximizing profit, and minimizing inventory cost. Users can assign these four goals to different weights, depending on their company goals. In terms of measuring customer service, users may wish to give preference to: quasi-fashion orders for delayed or early shipment. To do this, the user scales Xit using a value factor expressed as ait:

21 + |卜(需要曰期?), ,ί '^卜^需要曰期,), -若Μ (需要曰期) 若/>(需要曰期) (方程式14) 訂21 + | Bu (requires date?),, '' ^ 卜 ^ Requires date,), -If M (requires date) If / > (requires date) (Equation 14) Order

在方程式14中之ait的這種設定,暗示著:準時訂單具有最 高數值(2);裝運日期與需要日期之間的差值愈大,數值就 愈低;因此提早η個時段裝運之訂單的數值是延後η個時段 裝運之訂單的兩倍之多。(定標)客戶服務函數看起來像這 樣: -68- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(65 ) Μ Τ 最大化客戶服務=maxH\〜 /=1 /=1 (方程式15) 收益函數(revenue function)是與所有裝運獨立性需求有關 聯之收益的總和: Μ ^ . 最大化裝運收益= /=t t-\ (方程式16) 盈利函數(margin function)是與所有裝運獨立性需求有關 聯之收益的總和: Μ Τ 最大化裝運盈利=m狀. /=Ι M (方程式17) 存貨成本函數忽略在製品的價值,換成是只包括”擱置 ’’(οη-the-shelf)存貨: Μ ^ 7 > (w ( τ \\ 最小化存貨成本=min Σ + hk - Σ11 ^ { /=, J \ /=i //- (方程式18) 在方程式18中之方括弧内的第一雙重總和項是:在每個規 劃時段結束時,在存貨中的項目之資金成本。第二項則是 說明:已經針對工令單發放但尚未消耗的存貨成本。當消 耗發放存貨時,就會從發放量(以tjkt表示)中扣除消耗量(以 Ujlct 表示)。 -69- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(66 ) 用戶藉著將諸多嚴格正的權重賦予列示於上的四個目標 其中一個以上的目標來組合多重目標。在組合目標函數 中,將四個函數中的每個函數都乘以其對應的加權因數 (weighting facto〇(若一個或更多目標被用戶賦予零權 重,則此目標就不會影響到生產日程表)。假設,公尺, ύΜ,及心分別是··針對客戶服務,收益,盈利,及庫存量 之用戶賦予的加權。 為了準破地反映用戶賦予的加權,組合目標函數首先必 須定標以上四個函數中的每個函數,以使它們成為可概略 比較的。考量具有$1,000之關聯收益的客戶訂單,並且假 定用戶希望最大化客戶服務和收益。其中賦予每個目標相 等的權重。若並未將定標因數應用到以上函數,則準時裝 運訂貨會貢獻(contribute)的數值··客戶服務為2,而收益 則為1,000—這些貢獻一點也不相等。幾種不同的定標方法 可能是合理的。在一實施例中,供應會定標分離目標,使 得每個項目都會具有最多為1的數值。假設aes,aR,,以 及1分別是:針對客戶服務,收益,盈利,及庫存量的定標 因數 «供應會將這些量設定如下: acs = =l/max(ait) » (方程式19) Sr = l/max(ait); (方程式20) 5μ = l/max(5u);以及 (方程式21) ai = l/max(Cj(現有庫存量+固定預定接收量)jt)。 (方程式22) 在方程式22中,術語”固定預定接收量"(fixed scheduled -70- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)This setting of ait in Equation 14 implies that: the on-time order has the highest value (2); the larger the difference between the shipping date and the required date, the lower the value; therefore, the The value is more than double the order for shipments delayed by n periods. (Calibration) The customer service function looks like this: -68- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (65) Τ Maximize customer service = maxH \ ~ / = 1 / = 1 (Equation 15) The revenue function is the sum of the revenues associated with all shipping independence requirements: Μ ^. Maximizing the shipping revenue = / = t t- \ (Equation 16) The profit function is the sum of the benefits associated with all shipping independence needs: Μ Τ Maximize the profit on shipments = m. / = Ι M (Equation 17) The cost of inventory function ignores the value of work in process, replaced by Include only “shelving” (οη-the-shelf) inventory: Μ ^ 7 > (w (τ \\ minimize inventory cost = min Σ + hk-Σ11 ^ {/ =, J \ / = i //- (Equation 18) The first double total term in the square brackets in Equation 18 is: at the end of each planning period, the capital cost of the item in inventory. The second item is an explanation: the work order has been issued But the cost of inventory that has not yet been consumed. The amount of consumption (expressed in tjkt) is deducted from the amount of consumption (expressed in Ujlct). -69- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (66) The user borrows We focus on combining multiple goals by assigning many strictly positive weights to one or more of the four goals listed above. In the combined objective function, each of the four functions is multiplied by its corresponding weighting factor ( weighting facto〇 (If one or more goals are given zero weight by the user, this goal will not affect the production schedule.) Assumptions, meters, vertices, and minds are for customer service, revenue, profit, Weights assigned by users. In order to accurately reflect the weights assigned by users, the combined objective function must first calibrate each of the above four functions to make them roughly comparable. Consider $ 1,000 Customer orders that are associated with revenue, and assume that the user wants to maximize customer service and revenue. Each target is given equal weight. If no scaling factor is applied to With the above function, the value of the contribution of the quasi-courier order will be 2. Customer service is 2, and the revenue is 1,000—these contributions are not equal at all. Several different calibration methods may be reasonable. In the embodiment, the supply will calibrate the separation target so that each item will have a value of up to 1. Assume aes, aR, and 1 are: the calibration factors for customer service, revenue, profit, and inventory « The supply sets these quantities as follows: acs = = l / max (ait) »(Equation 19) Sr = l / max (ait); (Equation 20) 5μ = l / max (5u); and (Equation 21) ai = l / max (Cj (existing inventory + fixed scheduled receipt) jt). (Equation 22) In Equation 22, the term “fixed scheduled receipt” (fixed scheduled -70-) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071578071

receipts)指的是:無法取消或分割的採購單 ,申購單,或 =7單右目標是最小化庫存量,則在任何時段中的庫存 應該不會超過現有庫存量加上岐預定接收量;那就 疋’在相同時段中,沒有消耗:應該不會被生產(或接收, 在採購項目的情形下)的項目。 組合目標函數看起來像這樣:Receipts) refers to: purchase orders, purchase orders, or = 7 orders that cannot be canceled or divided. The right goal is to minimize inventory, so the inventory in any period should not exceed the existing inventory plus the predetermined receipt amount; Then 疋 'in the same period, there is no consumption: items that should not be produced (or received, in the case of purchased items). The combined objective function looks like this:

μ τ μ f τ \ μ ί τ max ^ΣΣ〜χ"+ω/^Σ +ω^Σ Α·Σ' /=ι ^=1 /=ι /=ι /=ι /=ι (〇ιΎι (Μ Σ ( Τ \ Μ + Σ ( Τ , τ ijk - Σ ujkt 1户丨 V /=| ) 7 = 1 L “丨 \ ί=ι )) Λ (Ε (方程式23) 裝 注意:在方程式23中,從其它函數的總和中扣除存貨成本 函數,以最小化存貨成本,但是會最大化所有其它量。 資源聂佳化程式300 返回到圖1D,供應系統1〇〇包括:資源最佳化程式 (RESO)300。RESO 300是一種供應應用程式,它會將所 有供應品配置到針對一種可交貨產品的獨立性需求。鑑於 供應規劃程式200疋管理零件,而res〇 300則是管理需求 訂單。RESO 300會建立優先序且來自輸出表,並且會修改 獨立需求的優先序。用戶可能使用RES〇 3〇〇來產生報表, 該報表會透露在目前日程表中可能進行改善的地方,以便 善用用戶之資源。 -71 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家搮準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 訂μ τ μ f τ \ μ ί τ max ^ ΣΣ ~ χ " + ω / ^ Σ + ω ^ Σ Α · Σ '/ = ι ^ = 1 / = ι / = ι / = ι / = ι (〇ιΎι ( Μ Σ (Τ \ Μ + Σ (Τ, τ ijk-Σ ujkt 1 household 丨 V / = |) 7 = 1 L “丨 \ ί = ι)) Λ (Ε (Equation 23) Note: in Equation 23 , The inventory cost function is subtracted from the sum of other functions to minimize inventory costs, but will maximize all other quantities. Resource Nie Jiahua program 300 Return to Figure 1D, the supply system 100 includes: resource optimization program ( RESO) 300. RESO 300 is a supply application that configures all supplies to independent requirements for a deliverable product. Given the supply planner 200 疋 manages parts, res〇300 manages demand orders. RESO 300 will establish priorities and come from the output table, and will modify the priority of independent requirements. Users may use RES0300 to generate a report, which will reveal possible improvements in the current schedule in order to make good use of User Resources -71-This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297) ) Order

線 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(68 在供應規劃程式200後面的邏輯與傳統MRPII系統類似。 明確地說,供應規劃程式200是由下列因素所驅動,諸如: 產品結構,零件成本,可用性以及訂購政策。然而,使用 傳統MRPII邏輯可能使獨立性需求與滿足那些需求所需的 供應之間的關係變模糊。於是,RES0 300使用:反轉使用 傳統MRPII邏輯之效果的邏輯。明確地說,RESO 300會藉 由容許用戶使供應品的使用與個別戶訂單’主日程表項 目,以及額外使用量項目匹配來恢復(restore)用戶需要的 可見性。具備透過RESO 300加以快速調查供應規劃程式 200結果,用戶就能夠提供針對下列問題的解答,諸如··在 月底以前打算生產的零件數(number of units);選擇將以 最小投資來產生最大收益的目前訂單;預測一份偶入訂單 (drop-in order)將會怎樣影響到用戶之曰程表;以及預測 產能怎樣影響到規劃曰程表。RES0 300會顧慮到和使用由 供應規劃程式200建議的供應品和行動,以作為反向規劃 (reverse planning)的基礎。RES0 300會回溯配置所有供 應項目以適於用戶之獨立性需求,它是以先匹配先遞補 (first matched-first filled)為基礎。雖然母當需要解答列 示於上的各種情況時,用戶能夠使用RE SO 300 ;但是,通 常只會在用戶己經執行供應規劃程式200以產生一種生產計 劃之後才使用。特別是,為了發展出如何配置那些供應品 的清晰視圖,用戶就應該具有供應位置之準確描寫。 RES0 300通常要求來自供應規劃程式200之一供應計劃 (那就是,基本聯網表或一各別定義聯網表的内容)作為其基 -72- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家操準(CNS) A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐)Line 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (68 The logic behind the supply planner 200 is similar to the traditional MRPII system. Specifically, the supply planner 200 is driven by the following factors, such as: product structure, parts costs, availability, and ordering Policy. However, the use of traditional MRPII logic may obscure the relationship between the need for independence and the supply needed to meet those needs. Thus, RES0 300 uses: the logic that reverses the effects of using traditional MRPII logic. Specifically, RESO 300 will restore the user's needed visibility by allowing users to match the use of supplies with individual household orders' main schedule items and additional usage items. It has the ability to quickly investigate the supply planner 200 results through RESO 300 , The user will be able to provide answers to the following questions, such as the number of units planned to be produced before the end of the month (number of units); select the current order that will generate the largest return with the minimum investment; predict a drop-in order (drop- how in order) will affect users ’schedules; and how forecasted capacity will affect To the planning schedule. RES0 300 will consider and use the supplies and actions recommended by the supply planner 200 as the basis for reverse planning. RES0 300 will retroactively configure all supply items to suit the user's needs. The requirement of independence is based on first matched-first filled. Although the user can use RE SO 300 when he needs to answer the various situations listed above; however, usually only when the user has It is used after the supply planning program 200 is executed to produce a production plan. In particular, in order to develop a clear view of how to configure those supplies, the user should have an accurate description of the supply location. RES0 300 usually requires from the supply planning program 200 A supply plan (that is, the contents of a basic networked table or a separately defined networked table) is used as the basis-72- This paper standard applies to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (21〇X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7578071 A7 B7

五、發明説明(69 本輸入資訊。RESO 3 00也可能使用來自由用戶所載明之其 它表的資料,諸如:以上所描述的產品結構(PS),客戶訂 單(CO),主曰程表(MS),以及額外使用量(EU)諸表。 RESO 300會將這種資料儲存在資料庫11〇中的諸表内,諸 如:資源最佳化表和資源最佳化細目(Resource Optimization Detail,簡稱RESOD)表。來自 RESO 表和 RESOD表的組合結果隨後可能出現在資源最佳化行動表 中。一般說來,來自供應規劃程式200的聯網表會包含:針 對在主項目(ItemMaster,簡稱IM)表中之每個零件的完整 供應輪廓(full supply profile);其中:在供應規劃程式 200執行曰期(run date)與規定供應規劃程式2〇〇期限曰期 (horizon date)之間,隨時都會存在需求。以上所定義的客 戶訂單,主日程表,以及額外使用量表的内容也可能是供 應程序(需求)的輸入資訊,因此將會影響到供應規劃程式 200的結果。雖有傳統MRP輸出資訊,要一次一個階層地 追踪(trace)遍及物料表(BOM)之表的所有層次(layers)的 那些關係卻是挺困難的。 因此,在圖3中之資源最佳化方法301的第一步驟是驗 證:隨著適當供應計劃的結果,一種聯網表已經存在,步 驟310。不適當供應規劃程式200之一實例是基於一種過時 的(out-0f-date)用戶計劃。RESO 300通常會查看庫存量, 以便計算可能數量。然而,藉由計算可能數量,就可能要 考量其它供應來源。可能數量將會查看工令單和其它供應 來源’如果載明的話。就每個供應來源而言,用戶可能選 -73- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家襟準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐)5. Description of the invention (69 input information. RESO 3 00 may also use data from other tables specified by the user, such as: product structure (PS), customer order (CO), main schedule as described above) (MS), and additional usage (EU) tables. RESO 300 stores this data in tables in the database 110, such as: Resource Optimization Table and Resource Optimization Detail RESOD) table. The combined results from the RESO table and the RESOD table may subsequently appear in the resource optimization action table. Generally speaking, the networking table from the supply planner 200 will include: for the main item (ItemMaster, referred to as IM) The full supply profile of each part in the table; where: between the run date of the supply planner 200 and the specified date of the supply planner 200 time (horizon date) There is a demand. The customer order, main schedule, and additional usage meter defined above may also be input information for the supply process (demand), so it will affect The results of program 200 should be planned. Although there is traditional MRP output information, it is very difficult to trace those relationships across all layers of the BOM table one level at a time. Therefore, in the figure The first step of the resource optimization method 301 in 3 is to verify that with the results of the appropriate supply plan, a network table already exists, step 310. An example of an inappropriate supply planner 200 is based on an outdated (out- 0f-date) user plan. RESO 300 will usually check the inventory to calculate the possible quantity. However, by calculating the possible quantity, it may be necessary to consider other sources of supply. The possible quantity will be viewed in the work order and other sources of supply 'if It is stated. For each source of supply, the user may choose -73- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(70 ) 擇顧慮或不顧訂購曰期,以便適合需求。 藉由聯想選定客戶訂單及/或主日程表項目(那就是,針對. 產品的獨立性需求)回溯到聯網表中的個別供應記錄, RESO 300就會透露和定量(quantify)諸多關係。RESO 3 〇〇會智慧地移動,遍及所有階層;因而精確地顯示將要怎 樣滿足每項需求。基於針對表所定義的排序順序,將RESO 表中的每項記錄都按照順序地匹配。這種定序操作 (sequencing)是由一種需求追踪號碼(針對品之獨立性需求 的每項記錄)所表示,該號碼是由最佳化程序所自動賦予 的。對於在RESO表中的每個需求追踪號碼(peg number) 而言,最佳化程序會摘取和配置來自列示於聯網表中之供 應記錄的零件,以便滿足需求。 RESO 300之一互補性功能是:用來計算和報告都是理論 上可用的諸多零件(產品和組件)之可能數量。同樣地, RESO可能確定針對數量可用性的可能日期,該數量是滿足 在RESO順序中的每個點處之需求所需要的。可能數量數值 和可能日期通常都是在RESO和RESOD兩種表中。精確地 瞭解這些數值表示什麼是挺重要的。一零件的可能數量表 示:在已經滿足針對該零件的所有先前配對需求之後的可 用數量;而可能數量為0則意謂著··已經將所有存貨和工令 單配置到一種較高優先序的需求追踪序號(sequence numbers)。因為列示於RESO表中的零件都會識別針對有 獨立性需求的產品,所以在RESO表中所報告的那些零件之 可能日期表示:假設在任何先前點處已經發生配置組件之 -74- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (70) Choose to worry or disregard the order date in order to meet the needs. By associating customer orders and / or master schedule items (that is, for product independent requirements) back to individual supply records in the networking table, RESO 300 will reveal and quantify many relationships. RESO 3 will move intelligently across all levels; thus showing exactly how each need will be met. Each record in the RESO table is matched sequentially based on the sort order defined for the table. This sequencing is represented by a demand tracking number (each record for the independent requirement of the product), which is automatically assigned by the optimization process. For each peg number in the RESO table, the optimization procedure extracts and configures the parts from the supply records listed in the networking table to meet the demand. One complementary feature of RESO 300 is that it is used to calculate and report possible quantities of many parts (products and components) that are theoretically available. Similarly, RESO may determine a possible date for the availability of quantities that are needed to meet the demand at each point in the RESO sequence. The possible quantity values and possible dates are usually in both RESO and RESOD tables. It is important to know exactly what these values mean. The possible quantity of a part indicates: the available quantity after all previous matching requirements for the part have been met; and the possible quantity of 0 means that all inventory and work orders have been allocated to a higher priority Sequence numbers. Because the parts listed in the RESO form will identify products that have a need for independence, the possible dates for those parts reported in the RESO form represent: assuming the configuration component has occurred at any previous point Standards apply to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

k 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(71 )k 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (71)

零件,則在RESO順序中的該點處可能建造出什麼東西。 在RESO表中所識別的零件(它們不是產品)都是投入一組 織之產品中的組件之零件。針對這些組件之零件的可能日 期表示:可供配置到在RES0順序中的該點處之獨立性需求 利用的零件。這種配置反映了 :在先前點處已經發生該組 件之零件的任何配置。 當確定可能曰期(Possible Date)時,RESO 3〇〇可能會 確定一個有效日期(Available Date)。將有效日期加以計算 成為·供應規劃程式200執行日期加上任何短缺零件的最長 前置時間。若可能日期等於供應規劃程式2〇〇執行日期,這 意謂著:沒有短缺零件;並且,在目前存貨中,組織會使 所有零件都需要滿足日程表序號。若有效日期大於針對 程表序號的需要日期,則有零件短缺。這種短缺結果會、▲ 成·打算將有效日期按照一種等於短缺的零件或諸多 之累積前置時間的量度加以推出(pushed 〇ut)。有 士一· 巧穷^日期 表示··可能滿足由產品料號所載明之獨立性需求的日i ' 這種結果是基於:組件之零件的可用性,以及任何零件-缺的累積前置時間。對於組件(既不是產品也不是裝自 ^ 項目)而言,可能日期表示:零件的最早可用性,如 的 際供應和供應規劃程式200建議供應品的話。 實 通常,RESO 300會採用第一可用供應品來滿足需托、 而’在考量客戶訂單的某些實例中,RESO可能使特a °然 與需求叹配,步驟320。為了考慮此事,供應系應 用戶載明匹配專案集合(Match Project Sets)。际祉0容許 配辦專案集 -75- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家棣準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)Parts, what might be built at that point in the RESO sequence. The parts identified in the RESO table (they are not products) are parts that are put into the assembly of a group of products. The possible dates for the parts of these assemblies represent the parts available for deployment to the requirements of independence at that point in the RES0 sequence. This configuration reflects: any configuration of parts of the assembly that have occurred at a previous point. When a Possible Date is determined, RESO 300 may determine an Available Date. The effective date is calculated as the supply planner 200 execution date plus the longest lead time for any missing parts. If possible, the date is equal to the supply plan 2000 execution date, which means: there is no shortage of parts; and, in the current inventory, the organization will make all parts need to meet the schedule number. If the effective date is greater than the required date for the schedule number, there is a shortage of parts. The result of such a shortage will be: ▲ Intention to push out the expiry date according to a measure equal to the shortage of parts or many cumulative lead times (pushed out). Youshiyi · Qiao poor ^ Date indication ... The day i may meet the independence requirements specified by the product part number This result is based on the availability of the component parts and the cumulative lead time of any parts-missing . For components (which are neither products nor installed items), the possible dates indicate the earliest availability of parts, as suggested by the International Supply and Supply Planner 200. In fact, RESO 300 will use the first available supply to meet the demand, and in some instances when considering customer orders, RESO may match features to demand, step 320. To take this into account, the supply department should specify match project sets. International Welfare 0 Allowed To organize project collections -75- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 ____ B7 _ 五、發明説明(72 ) 合使用專案識別號(project identification,簡稱project ID)作為供應與需求之間的一種鏈接(link)。當RESO 300 遇到具有一個專案識別號的需求時,RES0 300首先會尋找 具有相同專案識別號的供應。若供應程式找不到具有相同 專案識別號的供應,則它會使用來自PS0的供應。 仍然是圖3,RES0 3 00被特別設計用來支援:在一預設 驅動(default-driven)最佳化行程之後的一種拉扯方法 (tweaking process)。當用戶檢視在一最佳化行程之後的 RES0結果時,用戶能夠對輸入資料作出特定調整,步驟 330。譬如說,用戶可能藉由提高個別需求的優先序號碼來 調整最佳化順序。用戶也能夠變更需要日期和需要數量; 並且,甚至於將諸多新需求直接增加到RES0 300中。用戶 隨後能夠再度執行RES0 300,以瞭解變更效果。RESO 300也會容許用戶:在步驟330期間,對資料作出分批式變 更。重新執行將會使用··由最佳化操作所最後使用之聯網 表中的供應資訊。並且,若用戶將諸多需求增加到RESO 表’則用戶也必須將它們增加到適當供應規劃程式200輸入 表;並且再度執行供應規劃程式2〇〇,使得:有一些供應與 諸多新需求配對。 當作步驟330的一部份,用戶也可能對優先序作出調整, 其中:最佳化操作會處理關於RESO表的需求。供應系統 1〇〇會藉由變更關於RESO表之優先序號碼而作出這些調 整。可能會以一種像分批的方式來執行這種特點,以便容 許用戶:依照要求時段來調整一特定零件或一組零件及/或 -76- 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家操準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 ____ 五、發明説明(73 ) 訂單的重要性。這種調整可能是基於所有需求或一特定需 求類型。並且,用戶可能將關於相同RESO表之優先序加以 調整好幾次,以便瞭解其中各種情節。 在另一實施例中,用戶可能進一步定義最佳化集合 (optimization sets)。最佳化集合都是用戶定義的諸多排 序和選擇順序^每個最佳化集合都是以和用戶可能己經定 義的仕何其它最佳化集合無關的方式來執行。通常,用戶 只希望將一個最佳化集合應用到一特定RESO表。以此方 式,用戶可能載明要使某些商品或商品群組最佳化。 繼資源最佳化分析之後,RESO 300可能形成和顯示:用 來描述分析結果的輸出報表,步驟340。在一實施例中, RESO 300可能產生一種詳細訂單狀態(Datailed Order Status)報表,以便提供:關於提早或延後訂單其中之一或 兩者之狀態的詳細資訊。詳細訂單狀態報表可能限於一些 特定現場或零件。詳細訂單狀態報表也可能限於一特定需 求範圍。詳細訂單狀態報表具有各種用途。主要地,該報 表會使用戶瞭解怎樣供應每份訂單。該報表會載明:諸多 個別組件和它們的供應訂單怎樣屨行頂層需求。在獲得關 於怎樣供應一份訂單的細目之後,用戶就能夠確定訂單為 什麼延遲。 同樣地,RESO 300可能產生一種用來摘要使用和需要什 麼零件的報表。明破地說,一種用處摘要(Where Used Summary)報表會提供:在用戶之物料計劃中,使用和需要 零件之處的摘要。這種報表的主要目的要瞭解:怎樣將一 -77- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家棣準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(74 ) 較低階層項目配置到獨立性需求。這種報表對分析供應品 的最佳使用是挺有用的。藉由瞭解每個零件的使用,用戶 就能夠相對容易地比較:需要日期對可能日期;隨後再對 各種訂單的優先序作出決策。 RESO 300也可能產生一種用來按月預計可裝運獨立性需 求的報表’它疋以需要/可用摘要(Need/Available Summary)報表的形式呈現’該報表會提供可裝運獨立性需 求項目之以金額表示的按月計劃(monthly projection)。這 種報表會提供:可裝運獨立性需求項目的一種以金額表示 之按月計劃。它是用來評估滿足用戶之計劃和裝運目標 (shipping targets)所需之投資的關鍵報表。 可能由RESO 3 00所產生的另一種類型的報表是:提供所 有延遲訂單之摘要的延遲訂單(Late Orders)報表。這種報 表會產生所有延遲訂單之摘要,不是先按照料號然後是需 要曰期,就是先按照需要日期然後是料號,就像延遲訂單 報表對話框中所載明的那樣。藉由一起查看這種報表和主 曰程表,用戶就能夠確定··用來滿足具有可用供應品之延 遲訂單的最佳方法。 同樣地,一種短缺零件摘要(Shortage Parts Summary) 報表會識別在摘要階層處之零件短缺。用戶能夠產生諸多 零件之一綱要(Syn〇pSis),該零件都是(諸多)買主或(諸多) 規劃程式的特定責任。這種報表被設計用來快速地識別零 件短缺。透過關於每個零件的摘要細節,用戶就能夠識 別:現有零件,訂購中零件,以及淨需求部位。使用短缺 -78- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家槺準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 ____ B7 _ V. Description of the Invention (72) The project identification number (project ID) is used together as a link between supply and demand. When RESO 300 encounters a demand with a project identification number, RES0 300 first looks for a supply with the same project identification number. If the provider cannot find a supply with the same project ID, it uses the supply from PS0. Still in Figure 3, RES0 300 is specifically designed to support: a tweaking process after a default-driven optimization of the stroke. When the user views the RES0 results after an optimization trip, the user can make specific adjustments to the input data, step 330. For example, the user may adjust the optimization order by increasing the priority number of individual needs. Users can also change the date and quantity required; and even add many new requirements directly to RES0 300. The user can then execute RES0 300 again to see the effect of the change. The RESO 300 will also allow the user: during step 330, make batch changes to the data. The re-execution will use the supply information in the networking table that was last used by the optimization operation. Moreover, if the user adds many demands to the RESO table, the user must also add them to the appropriate supply planning program 200 input table; and execute the supply planning program 200 again, so that: some supplies are matched with many new demands. As part of step 330, the user may also make adjustments to the order of priority, where the optimization operation will handle the requirements on the RESO table. The supply system 100 will make these adjustments by changing the priority number on the RESO table. This feature may be implemented in a batch-like manner to allow the user to: adjust a specific part or set of parts according to the required time period and / or Specifications (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 ____ 5. Description of the invention (73) The importance of the order. This adjustment may be based on all needs or a specific type of demand. Also, the user may adjust the order of priority of the same RESO table several times in order to understand the various scenarios. In another embodiment, the user may further define optimization sets. Optimization sets are user-defined many sorts and selection orders ^ Each optimization set is performed in a way that has nothing to do with other optimization sets that may be defined by the user. Generally, users only want to apply an optimized set to a particular RESO table. In this way, users may specify that certain items or groups of items are to be optimized. Following the resource optimization analysis, RESO 300 may form and display: an output report describing the analysis results, step 340. In one embodiment, the RESO 300 may generate a Datailed Order Status report to provide detailed information about the status of one or both of the early or late orders. Detailed order status reports may be limited to specific sites or parts. Detailed order status reports may also be limited to a specific demand range. The detailed order status report has a variety of uses. Primarily, the report will let users know how to supply each order. The report will show how many individual components and their supply orders fulfill top-level demand. After getting a breakdown of how to order an order, users can determine what order is delayed. As such, RESO 300 may produce a report that summarizes what is used and what parts are needed. To put it plainly, a Where Used Summary report will provide a summary of where parts are used and needed in a user's material plan. The main purpose of this report is to understand: how to apply this paper size to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (74) The lower-level items are configured to be independent Sexual needs. This report is useful for analyzing the best use of supplies. By understanding the use of each part, users can compare them relatively easily: the date needed is possible; the decision on the priority of various orders is then made. RESO 300 may also generate a report that is used to estimate the shipable independence requirements on a monthly basis. It is presented in the form of a Need / Available Summary report. Represents a monthly projection. This report provides a monthly plan for the amount of items that can be shipped for independence. It is a key report used to evaluate the investment required to meet a user's planning and shipping targets. Another type of report that may be generated by RESO 3 00 is a Late Orders report that provides a summary of all delayed orders. This report will generate a summary of all delayed orders, either by material number first and then by date, or by required date and then by material number, as stated in the Delayed Orders Report dialog box. By looking at this report and the master schedule together, users can determine the best way to meet delayed orders with available supplies. Similarly, a Shortage Parts Summary report identifies parts shortages at the summary level. The user can generate a synopsis of many parts (Synopsis), which are the specific responsibilities of the (many) buyers or (many) planning programs. This report is designed to quickly identify parts shortages. With summary details about each part, users can identify: existing parts, parts in order, and net demand locations. Shortage of use -78- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7578071 A7

裝 訂Binding

578071578071

關鍵性短缺零件。Critical shortage of parts.

裝 仍然是步驟340,RES0 300可能呈遞一種詳述產能訂單 狀態(Capacity Detailed 0rder Status)報表,它合提供· 針對提早或延遲訂單其中之—或兩者的詳細產⑽I該 報表可能限於-些特;^現場或零件。它也可能限於一特定 需求範圍。詳述產能訂單狀態報表具有各種用途。主要 地,該報表會提供:針對怎樣供應每份訂單的可見性。該報 表會載明:諸多個別組件和它們的供應訂單怎樣屨行頂層需 求。-^獲得怎樣供應-份訂單的細節,用戶就能夠更加 確定訂單為什麼延遲。㈣地說,藉由_一條關鍵性產 能訂單路徑(eapaeity 〇rder path),用戶就可能 零件。 再者,一種採購單行動(Purchase 〇rder Acti〇n)報表會 訂Installation is still step 340, RES0 300 may submit a detailed capacity order status (Capacity Detailed 0rder Status) report, which is provided together. For early or delayed orders, one or both of the detailed production. This report may be limited- ; ^ Site or parts. It may also be limited to a specific range of needs. Detailed capacity order status reports have various uses. Primarily, the report provides: visibility into how each order is supplied. The report will show how many individual components and their supply orders fulfill top-level requirements. -^ Get details on how to supply-orders, users can be more sure why the order is delayed. In short, with _ a critical capacity order path (eapaeity 〇rder path), the user is possible parts. Furthermore, a purchase order action (Purchase 〇rder Acti〇n) report will be ordered

顧示:由RESO 300所建議的所有採購單(p〇)或計劃供應^ 單(PSO)。用戶可能集中該報表於用戶希望檢查的採講單 上。攻種報表基本上是買主之工具;並且,用戶可能將報 表限於#疋買主,或者藉由包括所有買主而對情況有— 個全盤的認識。當查看包括有PS〇的這種報表時,買主就 能夠確應該考量哪些訂單以滿足需求之需求量。根據這 種報表,買主也能夠檢查:已經針對由RES〇 3〇〇所建議的 仃動(諸如:下推,上拉,或取消)而發出的採購單。若行動 疋可達成的,則貝主隨後能夠嘗試使行動付諸實施。整體 而吕,這種採購單行動報表將會提供:快速檢視付諸行動 採購單。 -80·Gu Shi: All purchase orders (p0) or planned supply ^ (PSO) suggested by RESO 300. The user may concentrate the report on the purchase order that the user wishes to check. The report is basically a tool for buyers; and, users may limit the report to # 疋 buyer, or have a holistic view of the situation by including all buyers. When viewing such a report that includes PS0, buyers can be sure which orders should be considered to meet demand. Based on this report, the buyer can also check that the purchase order has been issued for a move (such as: push down, pull up, or cancel) suggested by RES 03.00. If the action is not achievable, the owner can then attempt to implement the action. Overall, this purchase order action report will provide: a quick review of a purchase order in action. -80 ·

578071 A7B7 五、發明説明(77 ) 基於約東的主規劃成份400 返回到圖1D,在供應系統100中的另一種成份是:基於約 束的主規劃程式(CBMP)400。CBMP能夠確定用戶之物料 約束;以及視情況地,建構產能約束。這種特點會將像在 RESO 300中那樣的需求規劃之功能程式(functi〇nality)與 描述於下的有限資源規劃程式(FRP)800合併在一起,以適 應負載和產能需求。CBMP 400會確定:一種滿足用戶之物 料約束和產能約束(視情況地)的生產日程表。當比RESP 300和FRP 800時,CBMP 400會使用諸多線性規劃方法 (Linear programming methods)來解決物料和產能規劃問 題。這些先進的數學演算法給予CBMP 400決策能力,以 便基於它對生產日程表的衝擊而建立一份訂單。 可能將CBMP 400用於規劃。例如,有時候,縱使所有 零件都是目前可用於今日建立一份訂單,也不要建立該訂 單會更有利,是因為:決策不要今日建立訂單便能夠自由地 運用這些零件於明日完成三份其它的訂單。反過來說,若 今曰一份訂單能夠屬於一位最佳客戶;則不管會對整體曰 程表造成的後果如何,可能作出決策要今日建立該訂單。 CBMP 400具有一個全盤的認識是:使CBMP 400能夠避免 在曰程表初期作出拙劣決策;為此緣故,CBMP 400能夠 確定針對生產規劃問題的一些較佳整體性解決方法。同 時,CBMP 400包括:使用戶識別不同優先序群組的變通 性;藉以容許用戶:在任何可能的時候,促進建立高優先 序訂單。 -81 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家榡準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7B7 V. Description of the Invention (77) The main planning component 400 based on Yodon. Returning to FIG. 1D, another component in the supply system 100 is: the constraint-based main planning program (CBMP) 400. CBMP is able to determine the user's material constraints; and, as appropriate, construct capacity constraints. This feature combines the functional planning of demand planning (functiónality) as in RESO 300 with the finite resource planning (FRP) 800 described below to adapt to load and capacity requirements. CBMP 400 determines: a production schedule that meets the user's material constraints and capacity constraints (as appropriate). When compared to RESP 300 and FRP 800, CBMP 400 uses many linear programming methods to solve material and capacity planning issues. These advanced mathematical algorithms give CBMP 400 the ability to make decisions to build an order based on its impact on the production schedule. CBMP 400 may be used for planning. For example, sometimes, even if all parts are currently available to create an order today, it is more advantageous not to set up the order because it is decided not to set up the order today to be able to use these parts freely to complete three other tomorrow Order. Conversely, if an order can belong to one of the best customers today, then regardless of the consequences to the overall schedule, a decision may be made to establish the order today. CBMP 400 has a holistic view: enabling CBMP 400 to avoid making poor decisions early in the calendar; for this reason, CBMP 400 is able to identify some better overall solutions to production planning problems. At the same time, CBMP 400 includes: the flexibility to enable users to identify different priority groups; thereby allowing users to: facilitate the establishment of high-priority orders whenever possible. -81-This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

五、發明説明(78 ) 將基於約束的主規劃方法侧f示於圖4中。特別是, CBMP 400容許用戶設定:徹底理解用戶之組織的生產目 標,步驟41在步驟41()中,能夠按照—種從比較不重要 到比較重要的標度來調整CBMp _,以便對應㈣戶希 望附屬於四種可能目標的相對優先序權數,該目標為:⑴ 收盃,它表示針對所有裝運訂單的總收益;⑺盈利,它表 示針對所有裝運訂單的總盈利(金額值);⑺存貨,它是基 於.在每個時段結束時(如在用戶之CBMp選項中所定義 ,),在庫存中的所有項目之金額值;以及⑷客戶服務,它 是準時訂單數目的一種表示。若能夠提早或延後裝運訂 單丄則客戶服務目標會最大化:在其到期日時或附近裝運的 訂=數目。在一實施例中,用戶可能藉由拖矣(dragging) 一滑動動桿(slider bar)來檢視和設定每個目標的相對重要 性,因而指示:用戶所感受到的目標是比其它優先序來得比 較不重要,還是比較重要。 除了在步驟410中的以上描述之定義目標外,用戶也能夠 定義諸多約束,以便設定:用來最佳化一種計劃的諸多優先 序和優先選擇。用戶可能希望在期限週期内定義一連串階 段(Phases)是有幾個理由。例如,用戶可能想要在用戶之 供應計劃中改變優先序,使它酷似用戶之製造週期。姑且 說’用戶具有一個六個月期限;並且,就每季而言,用戶 希望:(1)強調(emphasize)針對一季的最先兩個月之客戶 服務’以及(2)強調針對一季的最後一個月之收益。為了反 映這種強調,用戶能夠設定CBMP 400目標優先序以匹配 -82- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家襟準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(79 用戶之遇期優先序’其方法是:(1)在涵蓋最先兩個月的階 段中,用戶應該會告知CBMP 400要強調客戶服務;(2)就 第三個月階段而言,設定CBMP 400以便集中於收益作為 用戶之優先序上;以及(3)第三和第四階段的設定應該會重 複前面兩種方法。在以這些設定來執行CBMP 400之後, 供應規劃糕式200和資源最佳化程式300將會更準確地追踪 用戶之製造優先序。 在步驟41〇中’用戶也可能載明·每最佳化週期的最大§丁 單數目。以此方式,用戶可能載明:針對提議生產階層之 上界。可能基於用戶具有之約束零件數目以及在用戶之規 劃期限中的時段數目來形成一種預先載明的建議數值。 在用戶載明生產目標之後,在步驟420中,CBMP 400會 確定:一種針對RESO表中之獨立性需求的最佳生產順序 (optimal production sequence)。可能使用諸多熟知的技 術來植入最佳順序之產生。例如,可能使用以上援引的美 國專利序號第09/984,327號的諸多系統及方法,以便使用 包含於RESO表或在資料庫11〇中之其它表中的資料來確定 最佳生產順序。 CBMP 400可能隨後產生一種中間輸出表(intermediate output table),步驟430 〇 CBMP可能進一步根據已識別生 產順序而重新排序(resort)RESO表;其後,再以上述的最 佳適合供應配置邏輯來執行RES0 3 00。中間輸出表會記 錄:CBMP 400產生用來達成其計劃的計劃供應訂單,以 及CBMP根據預定接收量所執行的任何行動。RES0 300可 -83- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)V. Description of the Invention (78) The constraint-based main planning method side f is shown in FIG. 4. In particular, CBMP 400 allows users to set: thoroughly understand the production goals of the user ’s organization. Step 41 In step 41 (), it is possible to adjust CBMp _ according to a scale from less important to more important, so as to correspond to customers. I want to attach the relative priority weights to the four possible goals, which are: ⑴ Closed cups, which represents the total revenue for all shipping orders; ⑺ Profits, which represents the total profit (amount value) for all shipping orders; ⑺ inventory It is based on the value of all the items in the inventory at the end of each period (as defined in the user's CBMp option); and customer service, which is a representation of the number of on-time orders. If shipment orders can be made earlier or later, the customer service goal will be maximized: orders = quantity shipped on or near its due date. In an embodiment, the user may view and set the relative importance of each goal by dragging a slider bar, thus indicating that the goal perceived by the user is compared with other priorities It's not important, it's still important. In addition to the goals defined above in step 410, the user can also define a number of constraints in order to set: the many priorities and preferences used to optimize a plan. There are several reasons why a user may wish to define a series of Phases during a period. For example, a user may want to change priorities in a user's supply plan so that it closely resembles a user's manufacturing cycle. Let's say 'users have a six-month period; and, for each season, users want: (1) emphasizing customer service for the first two months of a season' and (2) emphasizing the end of a season One month's earnings. In order to reflect this emphasis, the user can set the CBMP 400 target priority order to match -82- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Invention description (79 User's case The method of “period priority” is: (1) in the period covering the first two months, the user should tell CBMP 400 to emphasize customer service; (2) for the third month, set CBMP 400 to focus In terms of revenue as the priority of users; and (3) the settings of the third and fourth stages should repeat the previous two methods. After implementing CBMP 400 with these settings, the supply planning 200 and the resource optimization program 300 will more accurately track the user ’s manufacturing priorities. In step 41, the user may also specify the maximum number of orders per optimization cycle. In this way, the user may specify: for the proposed production level Upper bound. A pre-specified suggested value may be formed based on the number of constrained parts the user has and the number of time periods in the user's planning period. After the user specifies the production target, the In step 420, the CBMP 400 determines: an optimal production sequence for the independence requirements in the RESO table. Many well-known techniques may be used to implant the generation of the optimal sequence. For example, the above reference may be used U.S. Patent Serial No. 09 / 984,327 to determine the optimal production sequence using information contained in the RESO table or other tables in the database 110. CBMP 400 may subsequently produce an intermediate output table (Intermediate output table), step 430. The CBMP may further reorder the RESO table according to the identified production sequence; thereafter, execute RES0 3 00 with the best-fit supply configuration logic described above. The intermediate output table will record : CBMP 400 generates a planned supply order to fulfill its plan, and any action that CBMP performs based on a predetermined receipt. RES0 300 OK -83- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) )

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7578071 A7 B7

能使用在這種中間輸出表中的資訊,以便確定:能夠滿足 在CBMP順序中之需求的最新供應。其後,REs〇=㈧會^ 其結果記錄在RESO和RESOD兩種表中,就像根據以上扩 述之其正常操作的那樣。以此方式,用戶可能產生各= RESO報表,以便檢視一個cbMP行程的結果。 用戶也可能在步驟4 10中載明產能約束。若白虹* l枯產能約 束;則在步驟420中,CBMP 400會同時考量物料和產&約 束,以便確定一種計劃。這種計劃會顧慮到物料庫存=和 前置時間,也會保證:關於工作中心的計劃負载(planned load)絕不會超過可用產能。雖有產能約束,CBMp 4〇〇卻 會在其行程結束時(在RESO之後)執行一種有限資源規劃, 以便記錄在RES0D表和有限資源規劃(FRP)表中的詳細產 能需求,並且記錄在RESO表中的產能有效日期。用戶隨後 使用FRP報表來檢視:用戶之產能約束CBMP行程的結果。 當用戶應用描述於下的基於規則的最佳化(Rule-Based Optimization)時,用戶也能夠使CBMP 400顧慮到已建立 的優先序。 產品變更分析裎式500 產品變更分析程式(PCA)500會幫助用戶:當避免過剩和 過時存貨時,能夠快速地識別最有成本效益曰期(the most cost-effective date),以便引進一些新零件和產品。產品 變更分析程式會掃描資料庫110和使用由用戶所載明的參 數,並且會對用戶顯示:針對一種新產品系列(product line)或結構的逐步淘汰(phase-out)或逐步採用(phase-in) -84- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4规格(210 X 297公釐)The information in this intermediate output table can be used to determine the latest supply that can meet the demand in the CBMP sequence. Thereafter, REs〇 = ㈧ 会 ^ The results are recorded in two tables, RESO and RESOD, just like their normal operation extended from the above. In this way, the user may generate each RESO report in order to view the results of a cbMP trip. The user may also specify capacity constraints in steps 4-10. If Bai Hong * l has a limited capacity, then in step 420, the CBMP 400 will consider both the material and the capacity constraints in order to determine a plan. This plan takes into account material inventory = and lead time, and also guarantees that the planned load on the work center will never exceed the available capacity. Despite capacity constraints, CBMp 400 will perform a limited resource planning at the end of its trip (after RESO) in order to record detailed capacity requirements in the RESOD table and the Limited Resource Planning (FRP) table and record them in RESO Capacity expiration dates in the table. The user then uses the FRP report to view: the results of the user's capacity-constrained CBMP itinerary. When the user applies Rule-Based Optimization as described below, the user can also make the CBMP 400 take into account established priorities. Product Change Analysis Formula 500 The Product Change Analysis Program (PCA) 500 helps users: when they avoid excess and obsolete inventory, they can quickly identify the most cost-effective date to introduce new parts And products. The product change analysis program scans the database 110 and uses the parameters specified by the user, and displays to the user: phase-out or phase-out for a new product line or structure in) -84- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(81 ) 之最佳時間。明確地說,用戶能夠使用PC A 500,以便: (1)確定針對產品設計或新產品的變更將會怎樣影響到存 貨;(2)幫助用戶識別何時要建構變更,以作為一種將會造 成過剩存貨的量度;以及(3)幫助用戶分析:像單一零件替 代法那樣簡單,以及像隨著並行逐步淘汰一種舊產品系列 而引進一種新產品系列那樣複雜的變更。 整體而言,PC A 5 00會幫助用戶對變更作出回應。在製 造中,往往導因於工程變更,偶爾會要求針對一種產品而 逐步採用(即:引進)替換組件和逐步淘汰(即··停用)被替換 組件。產品也可能由於將一種新產品或產品系列引進製造 週期中或消除一種舊產品或產品系列而變更。不論用戶正 在處理單一組件之零件替換還是整個產品系列,用戶都可 能建構PCA 500。 使用PCA 500來調查組件替換的效果。為了各種理由, 諸如:利用競爭性組件定價(pricing),調整適於零件供應 可用性的波動,使工程變更具體化,以及啟用一種新產品 系列或逐步淘汰一種舊產品系列;在產品結構或構成 (make-up)中的這些變更可能是必需的。在某些情形下,針 對一種產品之諸多組件的變更對保存該產品之功能性 (functionality)是必需的。一般說來,要立即執行這種類 型的工程變更,以保證該產品的永續成功。然而,若在產 品結構中的變更是由資金(finances)或技術所驅動,則何時 執行變更的問題是比較困難解答的。PC A 5 00被設計用來 幫助用戶:確定可能是未消耗的(過時的)產品或零件數值。 -85-578071 A7 B7 5. The best time for the description of the invention (81). To be clear, users can use PC A 500 to: (1) determine how changes to product design or new products will affect inventory; (2) help users identify when changes are being structured as a way to create excess Inventory measures; and (3) help users analyze: as simple as a single-part replacement method, and as complicated as introducing a new product line as phase out of an old product line is introduced in parallel. Overall, PC A 500 will help users respond to changes. In manufacturing, it is often caused by engineering changes, and occasionally it is required to gradually adopt (that is, introduce) replacement components and phase out (that is, deactivate) replaced components for a product. Products may also change as a result of introducing a new product or product line into the manufacturing cycle or eliminating an old product or product line. Whether you are dealing with part replacement for a single component or an entire product line, you can build a PCA 500. PCA 500 was used to investigate the effects of component replacement. For various reasons, such as: using competitive component pricing, adjusting fluctuations in the availability of parts supply, materializing engineering changes, and enabling a new product line or phasing out an old product line; These changes in make-up) may be required. In some cases, changes to many components of a product are necessary to preserve the functionality of the product. In general, this type of engineering change is implemented immediately to ensure the continued success of the product. However, if changes in the product structure are driven by finances or technology, the question of when to implement the change is more difficult to answer. PC A 5 00 is designed to help users: determine product or part values that may be unconsumed (obsolete). -85-

578071 A7 B7578071 A7 B7

五、發明説明(82 PCA 500提供用戶一種報表,該報表會顯示··料號;有效 性變更[選代(iteration)]時段;基線值(baseline value); 以及變更時的數值,如果執行變更的話。 在下列實例中,產品A的結構目前包括:將會以組件之零 件C來代替的組件之零件b。除非零件b也被使用於其它產 品中,立即將它從產品A的結構中除去是可能造成過時存 貨。在用戶之庫房中的任何零件B以及訂購中的任何零件B 可能任其荒廢。此事可能表示對用戶之公司是一種實質損 失。為了減少損失,用戶必須確定:在組件變更之前,裳 件B的現存存貨什麼時候和有多少能夠被吸收;以及在變更 之前’有多少訂購中的B零件(如果有的話)是真正需要。如 果零件B恰巧是一種組裝零件,它具有其它組件之零件與它 自已的結構有關聯;則問題會變得越來越困難了。 根據PCA方法501之PCA 500的操作,如圖5中所續示。 PCA 500會使供應系統1〇〇計算基線供應計劃結果,步驟 5 1〇。然後,PCA 500會使供應規劃程式200執行在相同時 間間隔(time span)内的多數供應計劃行程(步驟520);將择 束存貨(ending inventory)的成本與基線供應計劃結果相比 較(步驟530);以及計算針對每個有效日期總過時存(步驟 540)。PCA貨會計算:從一特定產品變更開始曰期到—產 品變更期限曰期的基線供應計劃結果,其中期限日期是# 算分析的諸多規劃時段中的最後規劃時段。基線供應計劃 結果不會反映產品變更,而是反映物料計劃的所有其它方 面0 -86- —--- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(83 ) 在以上實例中,這意謂著:相對於產品A,尚未使零件C 生效。根據基線供應計劃結果,PCA將會確定:針對在用 戶之物料計劃中的每個和所有零件(不會剛好是與產品A有 關聯的零件)之結束存貨(成本)。此存貨變成用戶之基線折 舊剩餘值(baseline obsolete value)。其次,PCA 500 會 依照·由規劃時段數目所決定的增量(increinents)以及用 戶所δ又疋之那些時段的顆粒性(granUlarity),加以執行在 相同時間間隔内的多數供應計劃行程。這些行程中的第一 行程會確定供應計劃結果,在該處零件c立即代替零件^在 開始變更曰期時)。 在步驟520中的諸多後續行程會將替換曰期(生效曰期 (Effect Date))推出一個規劃時段。在這些行程中的每個行 程中’ PCA會计算··針對在計劃中之每個零件的結束存貨 (以金額表示)。然後將針對每個零件的結束存貨與基線供鹿 計劃的存貨相比較。將諸多差值加以計算,進而總計成^ -數值,它用來表示:可能導因於在每個有效日期時的組 件替換之總過時存貨。在整個過程期間,在諸多供應計劃 中的唯-差異S :由零件之替換(例如··以零件〇代替零件里 所造成的差異。使用以上實例,就能夠看出:將變更生效 曰期推得愈遠,則將會由需求所吸收的零件6之數量愈大· 因此’用戶之料㈣料存f就愈少。然而,將有^曰期 推得愈遠,生產會喪失針對零料的變更。若在物料中 沒有其它變更,則PCA 500會產生一種報表(pcA , 該報表會顯示:用戶等待替換零件B的時間愈長, -87-V. Description of the invention (82 PCA 500 provides users with a report, which will display the material number; validity change [iteration] period; baseline value; and the value at the time of the change, if the change is performed In the following examples, the structure of product A currently includes: component b of the component that will be replaced by component C of the component. Unless component b is also used in other products, immediately remove it from the structure of product A Is likely to cause obsolete inventory. Any part B in the user's warehouse and any part B in the order may be left unused. This may indicate a substantial loss to the user's company. In order to reduce the loss, the user must determine: Before the change, when and how much of the existing stock of the dress B can be absorbed; and before the change, 'how many B parts (if any) in the order are really needed. If part B happens to be an assembly part, it Parts with other components are associated with its own structure; the problem becomes more and more difficult. According to PCA method 501 of PCA 500 The operation is as shown in Fig. 5. The PCA 500 causes the supply system 100 to calculate the baseline supply plan result, step 5 10. The PCA 500 then causes the supply planner 200 to execute within the same time span. Most of the supply plan itineraries (step 520); comparing the cost of the ending inventory with the baseline supply plan results (step 530); and calculating the total obsolete stock for each effective date (step 540). PCA Goods Fair Calculation: Baseline supply plan results from the date of a specific product change to —the date of the product change deadline, where the deadline date is the last planning period of the many planning periods # calculation analysis. The baseline supply plan results do not reflect product changes, It reflects all other aspects of the material plan. 0 -86- ----- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (83) In the above example, This means that, relative to product A, part C has not been validated. Based on the results of the baseline supply plan, PCA will determine: for each and every item in the user's material plan The end inventory (cost) of the part (which will not happen to be a part associated with product A). This inventory becomes the user's baseline obsolete value. Second, the PCA 500 will determine the number of planning periods according to Increinents and the granularity of the user's delta periods (granUlarity) are applied to most supply planning trips in the same time interval. The first of these trips determines the supply plan results, where Part c immediately replaces part ^ at the beginning of the change date). Many subsequent trips in step 520 push the replacement date (Effect Date) out of a planned period. During each of these trips, the PCA calculates the final inventory (in terms of amounts) for each part in the plan. The closing inventory for each part is then compared to the inventory for the baseline deer plan. A number of differences are calculated and summed up to a ^ -value, which is used to indicate the total obsolete inventory that may result from component replacement at each effective date. During the entire process, the only difference in many supply plans is S: the replacement of parts (for example, the replacement of parts 0 with parts 0. Using the above example, it can be seen that the change will be effective on a daily basis. The farther it is, the greater the number of parts 6 that will be absorbed by the demand. Therefore, 'the user's data will be less and less. However, the farther you push the date, the production will be lost to zero material. If there are no other changes in the material, PCA 500 will generate a report (pcA, the report will show: the longer the user waits to replace part B, -87-

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(84 ) 有的過時存貨愈少。 如以上所定義的產品結構表,在PCA 500中扮演重要的 角色。一旦已經定義產品變更,並且在嘗試執行PC A之 前,用戶就應該保證:在產品變更中的所有拆換/替換零件 都會存在,並且都被正確地定義在主項目表中。再者,用 戶也應該保證:任何最近定義的母/子關係在PCA之前都不 會生效。在產品結構表中的兩個欄位會確定一種零件何時 生效一開始有效性日期(Start Effectivity Date)和結束有 效性日期(End Effectivity Date)。PCA 500之目的是用來 確定:哪些日期應該和供應計劃所存在的基線相比較。若 零件之母/子關係已經存在於產品結構表中,並且將其有效 性曰期設定在開始變更曰期當天或稍晚(那就是,在產品變 更的時段内);則由PCA 500將包括零件變更當作一種基線 條件。 在一實施例中,用戶可能變更由PCA 500所使用之時段 的顆粒性,通常會造成供應輪廓(Supply profile)隨時間而 移位。供應規劃程式200可能建議對特定供應品的行動,其 中:建議行動可能逐一行程地改變,因此會以不同的方式 來下推和上拉訂單。這樣就會導致:過時存貨不會均勻地 減少,並且甚至於可能隨時間而增加。造成各種供應計劃 結果之一理由是··正要被替換之零件具有一種訂購政策, 相對於確實所需的,該政策會指定(dictates)需要訂購多一 些,以滿足需求。若正要被替換之零件具有:最小訂購 量,或者是施加在其上的數量倍數;則供應規劃程式200可 -88- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (84) The less obsolete the inventory is. The product structure table, as defined above, plays an important role in the PCA 500. Once a product change has been defined, and before attempting to perform PC A, the user should ensure that all replacement / replacement parts in the product change will exist and are correctly defined in the master project table. Furthermore, users should also ensure that any recently defined parent / child relationship will not take effect before PCA. The two fields in the product structure table determine when a part becomes effective—the Start Effectivity Date and the End Effectivity Date. The purpose of PCA 500 is to determine which dates should be compared to the baselines that exist in the supply plan. If the parent / child relationship of the part already exists in the product structure table, and its validity date is set on the day of the beginning of the change date or later (that is, during the period of product change); then the PCA 500 will include Part changes are treated as a baseline condition. In one embodiment, the user may change the granularity of the time period used by the PCA 500, which typically causes the supply profile to shift over time. The supply planner 200 may suggest actions for specific supplies, among which: the suggested actions may change from one trip to the next, and therefore push and pull orders in different ways. As a result, obsolete inventory does not decrease evenly and may even increase over time. One of the reasons for the various supply plan results is that the parts being replaced have an ordering policy that dictates that they need to be ordered more than necessary to meet demand. If the part to be replaced has: the minimum order quantity, or a multiple of the quantity applied to it; the supply planning program 200 may be -88- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) )

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(85 ) 能產生比所需還多的供應品(那就是,建議訂單),終於導致 針對該零件的過時存貨。在另一實例中,當牽引一種大型 採購單時,過時存貨能夠從一個產品變更時段成長到下一 個時段。換言之,供應計劃建議重新排程會較早產生供應 品,以預備小型需求之所需,因而聽任大部份訂單過時。 若正要被替換之零件是一種裝配件,則這些情節中的一種 或更多情節可能會影響到正要被替換之裝配件的組件之零 件。 繼上述分析之後,PCA 500可能將其結果寫到PCA結果 表,步驟550。在步驟550中,也可能將該結果呈現在PCA 報表中。PC A報表會提供:每時段產品變更之轉出值 (rolling out value)的一種完整檢查,以期達到預計過時存 貨的數值等於零。雖然這是執行產品變更的最佳時間,但 是它可能不切實際。根據這種報表,用戶能夠將諸如機會 成本(opportunity costs)的因素與在任何時段的剩餘存貨 數值相比較,以便計算其產品變更實際成本。 比較器600 返回到圖1D,在供應系統100中的另一成份是:_比較器 600。具備供應系統100之能力,以便在短時間内執行各種 情節和檢視結果;某些優點就會變得顯而易見的。藉由和 多數供應計劃同時地變更和微調(fine-tuning)物料計劃, 用戶就能夠利用這種速度能力。因此,具備多數供應計 劃,比較一個以上的行程之結果是一件簡單的工作。恰好 針對此目的而已經發展出比較器600—它用來比較和報告任 -89- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (85) Can produce more supplies than necessary (that is, a recommended order), which finally leads to obsolete inventory for the part. In another example, when pulling a large purchase order, obsolete inventory can grow from one product change period to the next. In other words, the supply plan suggests that rescheduling will generate supplies earlier in order to prepare for small demand, and therefore leave most orders out of date. If the part being replaced is an assembly, one or more of these episodes may affect the parts of the component of the assembly being replaced. Following the above analysis, the PCA 500 may write its results to the PCA results table, step 550. In step 550, it is also possible to present the result in a PCA report. The PC A report will provide a complete check of the rolling out value of product changes in each period, in order to reach the value of the expected obsolete inventory equal to zero. Although this is the best time to perform a product change, it may be impractical. Based on this report, users can compare factors such as opportunity costs with the value of their remaining inventory at any time to calculate the actual cost of their product changes. Comparator 600 Returning to FIG. 1D, another component in the supply system 100 is: comparator 600. The ability to provision the system 100 to perform various plots and review results in a short time; some advantages will become apparent. By changing and fine-tuning material plans simultaneously with most supply plans, users can take advantage of this speed capability. Therefore, with most supply plans, comparing the results of more than one trip is a simple task. A comparator 600 has been developed precisely for this purpose-it is used to compare and report any -89- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071578071

何兩個供應計劃的結果之間的差異。比較器6〇〇給予用戶能 力’以便·將-個供應計劃和另_個相比較;並且依照幾 種詳細等級來檢驗兩者之間的差異。比較H6GG是-種既快 速又有效的裝置’它用來確定:針對用戶之生產計劃的特 疋羞更可μ怎樣影響到其存貨,甚至於達到個別零件的階 層。What is the difference between the results of the two supply plans. The comparator 600 gives the user the ability to compare one supply plan with another; and check the difference between the two according to several levels of detail. Comparing H6GG is a fast and effective device. It is used to determine how the special shame of the user's production plan can affect its inventory and even reach the level of individual parts.

裝 訂Binding

將比較方法6〇1繪示於圖6中。現在,使用一個實例來描 述支配著比較$ 600之操作的比較方法謝,用戶會執行供 應規劃程式200-次,步驟6iq,使用諸如:來自前日活動 之期末結餘(―balances)的目前資料。其次,用戶會 產生和。卩名-種表’諸如:聯網表,以便保存該供應計劃 的結果’步驟620。在目前實例中,將這個第—種聯網表命 j為NET。現在,若用戶希望分析其它變更之大型偶入訂 單的效果’㈣戶可能只是更新以上所定義的客戶訂單(c〇) 表,以便包括來自偶人訂單的資訊,並且重新執行供應規 劃程式200,步驟630。繼使用在步驟63〇中之已調整資料 而執行供應規劃程式200的第二次操作之後,用戶會產生一 種新表NET1,以便館存來自第二次執行(implementati〇n) 的結果,步驟640。然後,用戶留有能夠由比較器6〇0所使 用的兩種表·· NET和NET 1。明確地說,在任何時段中,若 在兩種聯網表中的期末結餘之間有任何差異或變異 (variance),則比較器會將差異記錄在一種比較結果 (Compare Results,簡稱CR)表中,步驟650。針對在基本 計劃(base Plan)中的每個零件而重複這種例行工作 -90- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(21〇Χ297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(87 ) (routine),直到在基本計劃中所發現的所有零件都已經被 造訪過為止,步驟660。然後,比較器600將會計算針對每 個時段的總變異,並且將發現資訊儲存在CR表中。 上述的比較聯網方法最適於兩種聯網表内容之間的快速 比較,兩種表都包含源自於相同主項目(IM)表的供應規劃 程式3結果。明確地說,對於供應規劃程式200的任何一種 操作而言,在IM表中之零件的號碼和排序順序都不能變 更。如以上所描述的,比較器600通常被用來比較兩種聯網 表的結杲。通常基於用戶之目前情況而從最近供應計劃中 產生第一種表。要探知(ascertain)諸如偶入訂單到達的實 際事件或者諸如訂購政策之提議變更的假設事件之結果。 因此,藉由:在資料庫110中執行必要的變更以便精確地描 述有興趣的變更,並且執行第二個供應計劃;就會產生一 種新聯網表以反映變更。然後,能夠比較這兩種聯網表, 以便評估變更的淨效果(net effect)。基於由用戶所選擇的 輸入資訊而計算:對於幾種類別和時段而言,針對在聯網 表中之每個零件的差異。在任何時段中,若在兩種聯網表 中的期末結餘之間有任何差異(將它指稱為變異),則將它記 錄在比較結果表中。針對在主項目表中的每個零件而重複 這種例行工作。能夠將差異表示為一種數量或貨幣價值 (monetary value)。在那時候,比較器600會計算針對每個 時段的總變異,並且將發現資訊儲存在比較結果表中。如 以下所定義的數量變異都是由比較器600加以計算。 使用在CR表中的資料,比較器600可能自動地產生比較 -91 -The comparison method 601 is shown in FIG. 6. Now, an example is used to describe the comparison method that governs the operation of comparing $ 600. Thanks, the user will execute the supply planning program 200-times, step 6iq, using current data such as the ending balance (―balances) from the previous day's activity. Second, the user generates a sum. Anonymity-species tables 'such as: networking tables to save the results of the supply plan' step 620. In the current example, the first networked table is designated j as NET. Now, if the user wants to analyze the effects of other large contingent orders, the customer may simply update the customer order (c) table defined above to include information from the contingent orders and re-run the supply planner 200, Step 630. Following the second operation of the supply planner 200 using the adjusted data in step 63, the user generates a new table NET1 to store the results from the second implementation (step 640), step 640 . Then, the user has two types of tables that can be used by the comparator 600: NET and NET 1. Specifically, if there is any difference or variation between the ending balances in the two linked tables in any period, the comparator will record the difference in a Compare Results (CR) table , Step 650. Repeat this routine work for each part in the base plan -90- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇 × 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ( 87) (routine) until all parts found in the basic plan have been visited, step 660. Comparator 600 will then calculate the total variation for each period and store the discovery information in the CR table. The above comparison networking method is best suited for a quick comparison between the contents of two networked tables, both of which contain the results of the supply planning program 3 derived from the same master item (IM) table. Specifically, for any operation of the supply planner 200, the number and sort order of the parts in the IM table cannot be changed. As described above, the comparator 600 is typically used to compare the results of two networked tables. The first table is usually generated from the most recent supply plan based on the user's current situation. It is necessary to ascertain the results of actual events such as the arrival of incidental orders or hypothetical events such as proposed changes to the ordering policy. Therefore, by: performing the necessary changes in the database 110 to accurately describe the changes of interest, and implementing a second supply plan; a new networking table is generated to reflect the changes. The two networking tables can then be compared to assess the net effect of the change. Calculated based on input information selected by the user: for several categories and time periods, the difference for each part in the networking table. At any time, if there is any difference between the ending balances in the two linked tables (referred to as variation), it is recorded in the comparison results table. This routine is repeated for each part in the master project table. Ability to express differences as a quantity or monetary value. At that time, the comparator 600 calculates the total variation for each period, and stores the discovery information in the comparison result table. The quantity variation, as defined below, is calculated by the comparator 600. Using the data in the CR table, the comparator 600 may automatically generate a comparison -91-

578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(88 ) 報表。比較報表會提供:針對所有零件之數量或成本變異 的檢視,該零件具有在正要被比較的兩種聯網表中之期末 結餘的差異。例如,比較報表可能包括每個零件之一詳細 列表,該零件具有在一個時段中的變異。藉由:每個依照 選定之時段/零件的變異類型,以及針對每個變異類型和依 照選定之零件/時段的總變異來顯示變異。同樣地,比較報 表可能提供:所有零件之每個時段總變異;或者是針對為 每個成本變異選項而請求的整個時段之一特定零件的總變 異。那就是,用戶將會瞭解:對於物料成本,人力成本等 等而言,在每一種成本之時段中的總變異。提供總成本以 協助用戶之分析。報表將會有所變化,端視由用戶所選擇 的比較選項而定,那就是:庫存平衡,所有需求,所有供 應,計劃供應訂單(PSO),或者預定訂單。比較報表可能進 一步顯示:如兩種聯網表中所表示的,在兩個提議供應計 劃之間的行動(那就是:取消,下推,上拉,新增)之變異。 這種類型的報表會提供:使新供應計劃運作所必須執行的 行動之摘要。用戶隨後可能按照零件來檢查列表,以便瞭 解:應該採取哪些行動,以及在兩個計劃之間的總成本差 異(變異)。 資源需求規劃程式700 返回到圖1D,供應系統100可能進一步包括:資源需求 規劃程式(RRP)700,它用來將由供應規劃程式200所產生 的主生產曰程表(MPS)轉換成針對諸多關鍵資源(key re sources)的需求。這些關鍵資源經常包括:人力,機器, -92 - 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(89 ) 倉庫空間,供應商之能力,以及資金(在某些情形下)。通 常,針對每個資源而實行對每個可用或示範產能的比較。 這種比較會協助用戶:建立一種切實可行的主生產日程 表。RRP 700執行的功能,主要是用來確定:具有屨行需 求之資源的關鍵資源。例如,若一工作站(workstation)變 成超載(overloaded),它就會假定用戶將會執行像增加額 外輪班(extra shift)之類的事情。 將RRP的操作摘要於圖7中。特別是,RRP方法701以用 戶首先執行供應規劃程式200為開始,步驟710。RRP 700 隨後會針對每個時段而計算每個工作中心的產能,直到期 限時段結束為止,步驟720。在每個時段的開始時會補給產 能。就預定的每個供應訂單而言,RRP 700會計算:關於 各種工作中心的負載。將必需的資訊保存在以上所定義的 工作中心和聯網表中。使用關於工令單或計劃供應訂單的 剩餘數量,利用針對項目的特定代表性途程 (Representative Routing),以便計算在每個工作中心處的 負載需求。若一份工令單是被部份完成和在進行中,則將 會藉由存取(accessing)針對每個工令單之有關工令單表的 最後途程完成(Last Routing Complete)和途程完成百分比 (Routing Percent Complete)兩個欄位的資訊來處理工令 單狀態。載明於最後途程完成襴位中的途程操作號碼會假 定:所有先前操作也都完成。在途程完成百分比中的百分 率數值會指示:在載明於最後途程完成欄位中的操作之 後,關於下一操作之已經完成的負載百分率。剩餘百分率 -93- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)578071 A7 B7 V. Statement of Invention (88) Statement. The comparison report provides a view of the quantity or cost variability of all parts that have a difference in ending balances in the two networking tables being compared. For example, a comparison report might include a detailed list of each part that has variability over a period of time. By: each variation type according to the selected period / part, and the variation for each variation type and the total variation of the selected part / period are displayed. Similarly, the comparison report may provide: total variation per period for all parts; or total variation for a specific part for the entire period requested for each cost variation option. That is, the user will understand the total variability in each cost period for material cost, labor cost, etc. Provide total cost to assist user analysis. The report will change depending on the comparison option selected by the user, that is: inventory balance, all demand, all supply, planned supply order (PSO), or scheduled order. The comparison report may further show: as indicated in the two networked tables, a variation in the actions (that is: cancel, push down, pull up, new) between the two proposed supply plans. This type of report will provide a summary of the actions necessary to make the new supply plan operational. The user may then check the list by part to understand what actions should be taken and the total cost difference (variation) between the two plans. Resource demand planning program 700 Returning to FIG. 1D, the supply system 100 may further include: a resource demand planning program (RRP) 700, which is used to convert the main production schedule (MPS) generated by the supply planning program 200 into a number of key Requirements for key re sources. These key resources often include: manpower, machinery, -92-This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (89) Warehouse space, supplier capabilities , And funding (in some cases). Generally, a comparison of each available or demonstration capacity is performed for each resource. This comparison helps the user: establish a viable master production schedule. The functions performed by the RRP 700 are mainly used to determine: critical resources with the resources required for liquefaction. For example, if a workstation becomes overloaded, it assumes that the user will perform things like adding an extra shift. The operation of RRP is summarized in FIG. 7. Specifically, the RRP method 701 starts with the user first executing the supply planning program 200, step 710. The RRP 700 then calculates the capacity of each work center for each period until the end of the period, step 720. Capacity is replenished at the beginning of each period. For each supply order booked, RRP 700 calculates: Loads for various work centers. Keep the necessary information in the work center and networking tables defined above. Use the remaining quantities on work orders or planned supply orders to take advantage of the project-specific Representative Routing to calculate the load demand at each work center. If a work order is partially completed and in progress, it will be accessed by accessing the last routing complete and process completion of the related work order form for each work order. The information in the two fields of Routing Percent Complete is used to process the work order status. The trip operation number specified in the last trip completion bit is assumed: all previous operations are also completed. The percentage value in the percentage of trip completion will indicate the percentage of the load that has been completed for the next operation after the operation specified in the last trip completion field. Remaining percentage -93- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 B7578071 A7 B7

五、發明説明(90 ) (remaining percentage)被用來計算:完成該操作所需的剩 餘負載。假定:呵有後續的操作都不會被起動;因此,具 有整個負載剩餘。將所有的這種資訊保存在一種概略細目 (Rough Cut Details,簡稱RCD)表中。在完成行程之後, RRP 700會產生一種PPR表,步驟730 ;該表會將針對每個 工作中心的每負載產能加以分成細目。 RRP 700通常會獲得來自下列不同表的資訊,該表包 括··工作中心表(WC),代表性途程表(RR),資源需求規劃 行動表(RRP),資源需求規劃時段表(RRPPER),以及工令 單表(WO) ^拫據WC表而計算出針對每個工作中心的產 能。就每個工作中心而言,呈現有最小和最大產能欄位。 RRP隨後使用來自聯網(NET)表的工令單記錄作為主規劃 曰程表供應來源。對於預定的每個訂單而言,RRP會計 算:來自發現於RR表中之它的每個途程之一負載。負載都 是藉由工作中心加以安排,並且輸入RRP表中。 在步驟730中,RRP 700也可能產生各種報表,該報表用 來摘要其發現資訊,包括有關:工作中心負載細目’工作 中心負載輸廓(Load Profile),以及工令單輪廓。工作中心 負載細目報表會列示··按照工作中心,按照時段的資訊; 以及打算被執行的工作。就每個工令單而言,該報表會顯 示:所需的總工作中心產能的百分率。因此,用戶能夠檢 查一個工作中心的順先序,以滿足未完成需求(outstanding demand);或者是,用戶能夠瞭解一個工作中心是否利用 不足/過度,因此隨後作出必要的管理決策。在比較方面, -94- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(91 ) 工作中心負載輪廓報表會提供針對一特定工作中心的產能 輪廓,並且會顯示:最大,正常,以及計劃產能,連同計 劃負載。將總計劃產能與總計劃負載相比較,以達成針對 工作中心的變異。然後能夠對此變異加以分析,以供工作 量分佈(workload distribution)和資源排程之用。仍然是 第三類型報表:工令單輪廓報表,它會提供”負載對每時段 產能”的一種目視表示法。這種報表容許用戶跟隨工令單, 遍及許多工作中心;以便確定:工令單是否會準時完成, 如果不是的話,就會確定哪個工作中心不是正在按預定時 間工作。就每個工作中心而言,它會清楚地顯示:用來完 成工令單的可用產能,以及將會承擔選定工令單的工作中 心百分率。 有限資源規劃程式800 有限資源規劃程式(FRP)800與RRP 700非常類似。特別 是,FRP 800會將MPS轉換成針對諸多關鍵資源的需求, 這些關鍵資源可能包括··人力,機器,倉庫空間,供應商 之能力,以及資金(在某些情形下)。然而,不像RRP 7〇〇 那樣,它會識別產能短缺和過剩,使得用戶能夠採取適當 行動;而FRP 800則是假定:規劃程式願意接受產能短 缺,並且希望調整計劃,以便產生一種顯示產能短缺的最 佳生產曰程表。FRP 800使工作到處移動,以保證負載絕 不會超過產能,這是因為:資源都是有限的,並且製造曰 程表必須在此約束附近運作。 FRP 800會執行各種工作,包括(1)基於物料和產能可用 -95- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(92 ) 性而確定獨立性需求的有效裝運曰期(available ship date) ; (2)計算關於所有工作中心的負載;(3)計算哪些組 合供應訂單正在造成獨立訂單延遲;以及(4)正確瞄準一些 生產瓶頸(production bottlenecks),其中一處瓶頸就是阻 止訂單不能準時可用的第一途程步驟。 將FRP 800的操作摘要成為在圖8中的FRP方法801。 ?尺? 800會根據11£80 3 00的輸出資訊而運作。因此,?1^ 會等待RES0 300之操作完成,步驟810。FRP 800隨後使 用RES0D表,以便建立兩個供應訂單之間的相依性 (dependencies),並且賦予這些訂單優先序,步驟820。在 RES0D表中,如以上所描述的,首先按照需求追踪號碼, 其次按照低階碼(low-level code),將諸多供應訂單加以排 序(ranked)。FRP 8 00也會包含:來自RES OD表的物料可 用性曰期。就每個需求追踪號碼而言,FRP 800會從物料 表(BOM)的底層開始,依照其方式運作而來到頂層,因而 儲備完所有中間供應訂單的有效日期。終端結果就是:針 對完整獨立性需求之物料和產能有效曰期。供應訂單之有 效曰期是:假定訂單具有一些途程步驟,當已經完成最後 途程步驟時的曰期。若它沒有途程步驟,則有效曰期是: 子項目有效日期加上前置時間。針對具有途程步驟之一供 應工令單,並且尚未對該工令單開始工作而言;當所有物 料都是可用時,第一途程步驟就會開始。將此日期通稱 為:訂單開始日期。從開始曰期起,針對每個途程步驟都 會發生負載程序(loading process)。FRP 800會在可用產 -96- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(93 能存在的曰期施加負載。FRp 8〇0隨後獲得來自工作中心 表的產能資訊。若在一既定曰期沒有足夠的產能,則FRp _將會在未用產能存在的下—日期消耗產能。這種途程步 驟會繼續,直到所有負載都已經被定位在工作中心中為 止。當完成第-途程步驟時,第二途程步驟就會開始,依 此類推,直到所有途程步驟都完成為止,步驟83〇。 該何進行中工令單而言,已經執行工作的某部份。可 月匕精由關於^單表之針對每個進行中卫令單的最後途程 完成和途程完成百分比兩個欄位來陳述工令單狀態。FRp 800會檢驗將被檢驗的每個工令單,以確定其狀態。若在最 後途程完成攔位中有一個有效操作號石馬(valid operation nUmbe〇,則FRP _會假定:目前操作和所有前面操作都 已經完成。若在途程完成百分比欄位中有—個有效百分 率’則FRP 8GG會假定··在最後途程完成襴位中所提及的 -個途程操作之後,關於下一途程操作之已經完成的百分 率。 通常,對進行中訂單而言,所有物料都被視為可用;它 所使用的假;t是:在開始卫作之前,物料必減可用的。 然而,若有開放性未發出的實際需求附屬於工令單,則 RES0 300將會5十算針對物料的有效曰期。FRp綱隨後會 假定:工作無法繼、續,直到物料可用為止。在那個時候, FRP _將會繼續計算針對可錢能的貞載。對每個流程 步驟而言,FRP 800會計算:需要提前完成曰期(need_ completion-by date)。這個曰期是:在沒有造成訂單延遲 -97- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公Fifth, the invention description (90) (remaining percentage) is used to calculate: the remaining load required to complete the operation. Assumptions: No subsequent operations will be initiated; therefore, there will be an entire load remaining. Keep all this information in a Rough Cut Details (RCD) table. After completing the trip, the RRP 700 generates a PPR table, step 730; this table breaks down the capacity per load for each work center. RRP 700 usually obtains information from the following different tables, which include: work center table (WC), representative journey table (RR), resource demand planning action table (RRP), resource demand planning timetable (RRPPER), And work order list (WO) ^ 拫 Calculate the capacity for each work center according to the WC table. For each work center, there are minimum and maximum capacity fields. RRP then uses work order records from networked (NET) tables as the main planning source of supply. For each order booked, RRP calculates: one load from each of its journeys found in the RR table. The loads are arranged by the work center and entered in the RRP table. In step 730, the RRP 700 may also generate various reports, which are used to summarize its discovery information, including: work center load breakdown 'work center load profile, and work order profile. Work center load breakdown report will list the information according to work center and time period; and the work to be performed. For each work order, the report shows the percentage of total work center capacity required. Therefore, the user can check the order of a work center to meet outstanding demand, or the user can know whether a work center is under- / over-utilized and then make the necessary management decisions. In terms of comparison, -94- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (91) The load center report of the work center will provide the capacity for a specific work center Outline and will show: Maximum, Normal, and Planned Capacity, along with Planned Load. The total planned capacity is compared to the total planned load to achieve variation for the work center. This variation can then be analyzed for workload distribution and resource scheduling. It is still the third type of report: work order outline report, which provides a visual representation of "load versus capacity per period". This report allows users to follow work orders across many work centers; to determine whether work orders will be completed on time and, if not, which work center is not working at the scheduled time. For each work center, it clearly shows the available capacity to complete the work order, and the percentage of work centers that will take on the selected work order. Limited resource planning program 800 The limited resource planning program (FRP) 800 is very similar to the RRP 700. In particular, FRP 800 will convert MPS into demand for a number of key resources, which may include manpower, machinery, warehouse space, supplier capabilities, and funding (in some cases). However, unlike RRP 700, which identifies capacity shortages and excesses and enables users to take appropriate action, FRP 800 assumes that the planner is willing to accept capacity shortages and wants to adjust plans to produce a display of capacity shortages The best production schedule. The FRP 800 moves work around to ensure that loads never exceed capacity because resources are limited and manufacturing schedules must operate near this constraint. FRP 800 will perform a variety of tasks, including (1) material and capacity availability -95- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Independence of the invention (92) Available ship date for sexual demand; (2) Calculate loads for all work centers; (3) Calculate which combined supply orders are causing delays in independent orders; and (4) Correctly target some production bottlenecks ), One of the bottlenecks is the first journey step that prevents orders from being available on time. The operation summary of the FRP 800 is referred to as the FRP method 801 in FIG. 8. ?ruler? 800 will operate based on the output information of 11 £ 80 3 00. therefore,? 1 ^ will wait for the operation of RES0 300 to complete, step 810. FRP 800 then uses the RESOD table to establish dependencies between the two supply orders and to prioritize these orders, step 820. In the RES0D table, as described above, a number of supply orders are first ranked according to a demand tracking number, and then a low-level code. FRP 8 00 will also include: material availability dates from the RES OD table. For each demand tracking number, FRP 800 starts at the bottom of the bill of materials (BOM) and operates in the same way to the top, thus validating the effective dates of all intermediate supply orders. The end result is: the effective date of materials and capacity for complete independence requirements. The effective date of a supply order is: assuming the order has some journey steps, the date when the last journey step has been completed. If it doesn't have a journey step, the effective date is: The effective date of the sub-item plus the lead time. For a supply order that has one of the journey steps and has not yet begun work on that ticket; the first journey step begins when all materials are available. This date is commonly referred to as the order start date. From the start date, a loading process occurs for each journey step. FRP 800 will be available at -96- this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (93 can apply the load in the existing date. FRp 800 is subsequently obtained Capacity information from the work center table. If there is not enough capacity in a given day, FRp_ will consume capacity when the unused capacity exists—date. This process step will continue until all loads have been located In the work center. When the first-step is completed, the second step will start, and so on, until all the steps are completed, step 83. What to do in the work order, has been performed Some part of the work. But the moon dagger will state the status of the work order from the fields of the final order and the percentage of completion of the order for each progressing guard order. FRp 800 will check what will be checked Each work order to determine its status. If there is a valid operation number Shima (valid operation nUmbe〇 in the final stop completion stop, FRP_ will assume: the current operation and all previous operations Both have been completed. If there is an effective percentage in the field completion percentage field, then FRP 8GG will assume that after the operation of the next journey mentioned in the final completion completion position, the next operation has been completed. In general, all materials are considered available for orders in progress; the fakes it uses; t is: materials must be available before the start of the work. However, if there are open The actual demand is attached to the work order, then RES0 300 will be 50 times the effective date for the material. The FRp program will then assume that work cannot be continued until the material is available. At that time, FRP _ will continue to be calculated For the chastity of money. For each process step, FRP 800 will calculate: need to complete the date (need_ completion-by date). This date is: without delay in order -97- this paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 male

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 ______B7 五、發明説明(94 ) 下’能夠完成流程步驟的最後日期。在正確瞄準瓶頸方 面,它是挺有用的;因8〇〇會利用一種假定每日最 大T用產月匕的回溯排程法(backward scheduling method) 來計算這些曰期。 將一個FRP行程的結果儲存於frP表中,步驟84〇。frP 表具有與RRP表類似的格式。在步驟84〇中,FrP 8〇〇可能 執行關於FRP表的報表,諸如:與RRP 700有關聯的報 表。除了描述於RRP 700中的諸多報表外,frp 8〇〇可能 產生一種詳述產能訂單狀態報表。詳述產能訂單狀態報表 會正確瞄準正在造成獨立性需求延遲的供應訂單。這種報 表與存在於RESO之下的詳細訂單狀態(Detailed 〇rder Status)報表非常類似。兩種報表之間的主要差異是:詳述 產能訂單狀態報表會返回產能和物料有效曰期,而詳細訂 單狀悲報表則只會返回物料有效日期。詳述產能訂單狀態 報表會提供··針對怎樣供應每份訂單的可見性。該報表會 載明·諸多個別組件和它們的供應訂單怎樣屨行頂層需 求。根據這種報表,用戶將會具有用戶之供應狀態的認 識,以便作出:關於用戶將會怎樣妥善克服延遲訂單情況 的決策。一旦獲得怎樣供應一份訂單的細節,用戶就能夠 確定訂單為什麼延遲。藉由識別要徑(Critical Path),用戶 就能夠隔離延遲零件,並且確定是否能夠催查它。 在另一實施例中,FRP報表也會顯示所有延遲供應項目, 不會剛好是要徑項目《若用戶正在嘗試催查一份延遲訂 單則他能夠確定一個更實際的有效日期。若用戶設法催 -98- 本紙張尺度適用中國國篆g^(CNS) A4規格(21〇Χ297公釐) 1 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(95 )578071 A7 ______B7 V. Description of the Invention (94) The last date when the process steps can be completed. It is quite useful in properly targeting bottlenecks; 800 will calculate these dates using a backward scheduling method that assumes the maximum daily T-monthly dagger. Store the results of an FRP trip in the frP table, step 84. The frP table has a similar format to the RRP table. In step 84, FrP 800 may perform a report on the FRP table, such as a report associated with RRP 700. In addition to the many reports described in RRP 700, frp 800 may produce a report detailing the status of capacity orders. Detailed capacity order status reports will correctly target supply orders that are causing delays in independent demand. This report is very similar to the Detailed Order Status Report that exists under RESO. The main difference between the two reports is that the detailed capacity order status report returns the capacity and the material effective date, while the detailed order status report only returns the material effective date. Detailed capacity order status reports provide visibility into how each order is supplied. The report will show how many individual components and their supply orders fulfill top-level requirements. According to this report, the user will have the knowledge of the user's supply status in order to make a decision on how the user will properly overcome the delayed order situation. Once the details of how to supply an order are obtained, the user can determine why the order is delayed. By identifying the critical path, the user is able to isolate the delayed part and determine if it can urge it. In another embodiment, the FRP report will also show all delayed supply items, not just the item "If the user is trying to urge a delayed order, he can determine a more practical effective date. If the user manages to urge -98- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard g ^ (CNS) A4 (21〇 × 297mm) 1 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (95)

查一種零件,則用戶能夠確定一份延遲訂單是否由於其& 組件之零.件而停滯。若用戶確定要徑零件(critieal pat匕 Part)目前在某個曰期是可用的,則用戶能夠解答:其 應品是否在該日期之後就會變成可用的問題。 ” 宴戶允諾裎式900 返回到圖1D,供應系統1〇〇可能進一步包括另一種、 伤稱之為·客戶允諾程式(customer promiser,簡稱cp 900)。CP運作用來協助用戶:快速地評估一份新訂單(鸽1" 訂單)的可行性。特別是,CP 900容許用戶··準確地允許〜 份新訂單的準時可用性。為了摘要cp 900的操作於cp方法 9〇1中,如圖9中所顯示的;供應系統首先會操作供應規劃 程式200和RES0 300,步驟91〇。使用來自供應系統1〇〇的 這些和其它成份的這些結果,CP 900會確定··顯示預先存 在可單的剩餘產能(remaining production capacity),步 驟92〇。將剩餘產能儲存於資料庫110中,步驟93〇。當〜 份新訂單到達時,由剩餘產能看來,CP會評估新訂單,步 驟940。特別是,cp只是使用在剩餘產能和新訂單中的資 源來執行供應規劃程式。若可能使用剩餘產能來完成新訂 單’則用戶可能會可靠地允諾要履行新訂單,步驟940。應 該注意的是:在步驟940中所形成的供應計劃通常不是最佳 的’因而可能從未使用過。換成是,供應計劃只是建議解 決供應配置問題的可行性;因此,可能藉由重新執行針對 所有訂單和所有生產輸入資訊的供應規劃程式200來進一步 最佳化供應計劃。 -99- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家榡準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐)By looking at a part, the user can determine if a delayed order is stalled due to zero parts of its & component. If the user determines that the critical pat part is currently available at a certain date, then the user can answer the question of whether his application will become available after that date. The Banquet Promise 900 returns to Figure 1D. The supply system 100 may further include another, nicknamed a customer promiser (cp 900). The CP operation is used to assist users: rapid assessment The feasibility of a new order (Pigeon 1 " order). In particular, the CP 900 allows users to accurately allow ~ just-in-time availability of new orders. To summarize the operation of the cp 900 in the cp method 901, as shown in the figure As shown in 9; the supply system will first operate the supply planner 200 and RES0 300, step 91. Using these results from the supply system 100 and other components, the CP 900 will determine ... display the pre-existing Remaining production capacity, step 92. The remaining capacity is stored in the database 110, step 930. When ~ new orders arrive, from the perspective of the remaining capacity, the CP will evaluate the new order, step 940. In particular, cp just uses the resources in the remaining capacity and the new order to execute the supply planning program. If it is possible to use the remaining capacity to complete the new order, then the user may The ground promises to fulfill the new order, step 940. It should be noted that the supply plan formed in step 940 is usually not optimal and thus may never be used. Instead, the supply plan is only a suggestion to solve the problem of supply configuration Feasibility; therefore, the supply plan may be further optimized by re-executing the supply planner 200 for all orders and all production input information. -99- This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) A4 (210X 297) (Mm)

裝 訂Binding

578071 A7 _______Β7 五、發明説明(96 ) 互_動式主排裎器〗〇ftn 互動式主排程器(Interactive Master Scheduler,簡稱 IMS)10〇〇之特點是:使用戶自動地或手動地修改預測需求 料’以便透過界面而輸入到主生產曰程表。IMS 1000是 一種針對在製造環境中之主排程器而設計的應用程式。IMS 1000容許主排程器使用:在使生產預測與銷售預測匹配方 面的專用商業判斷。IMS 1000以即時方式操作,以便調整 和產生:最佳反映目前商業環境的生產預測。當完成所有 需要的變更時,將主排程(Master Schedule)表加以佈局 (populated),因此供應最佳化程序就會開始。 IMS 1〇〇〇具有一種自動平準程式(aut〇-ieyeier),它會 調整預測以涵蓋負(negative)可用承諾(ATP),如果針對零 件之預測存在的話。自動平準程式會將任何未用預測轉前 (roll f〇rward)到:留在每月或每季中的剩餘時段。一旦將 自動平準完成處理,IMS 1000會標記所有族群(families) 和零件,以便將狀態(那就是:ATP,無ATP,或者負ATP) 傳達給主排程器。主排程器現在具有零件之排定優先序行 動列表;而針對這些零件的預測則需要加以檢查和調整。 主排程器能夠使用”拖動與下落’’(drag-and-drop)特點來更 新預測,以便將預測從一個時段移到另一個時段。當作出 調整時,IMS就會按照移動量來減少可用量。主排程器也能 夠決定增加預測,它會導致對目前計劃的增加。針對預測 而作出的任何調整都是在一種分離預測系列(forecast line) 中這樣完成的,以便保存原始預測。能夠將所有變更的審 -100- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明說明(97 ) 查追踪(audit trail)保存在按月檔案中。 IMS 1000會在下列三種基本排程情節期間協助用戶: (1) 當預測很接近地反映客戶訂單時,這時候,預測總 額(gross forecast)概略等於客戶訂單數目,因此有 正數可用承諾訂單。不需要利用自動平準操作來移 位時段預測:從本季的一個時段(time bucket)到另 一個時段,以便獲得正ATP。在這種情形下,主排 程器不需要調整預測。每次調整預測總額,必定經 常獲得這種情節。 (2) 當客戶訂單超過預測總額(ATP)時,在客戶訂單超 過預測的時候,就需要執行針對在整季期間都會有 負ATP之區域的時段預測移動。因此得到的負預測 都會在時段内自動地轉前。此事會在IMS特點的第 一行程期間發生;其後,能夠手動地調整負淨預測 (negative net forecasts)。譬如說,能夠以分割畫 面(split-screen)模式來顯示兩種族群;並且,用戶 能夠將預測總額從具有正ATP之一單元(cell)移到具 有負ATP之一單元。此外,用戶能夠調整在兩個單 元之間的ATP ;並且,當這麼做時,就會提示 (prompted) —個數值。目標是:支援既定銷售預測 和維持在兩個單元之間的正ATP ;並且,當這麼做 時,就會提示一個數值。目標是:支援既定銷售預 測和每季内維持正ATP。若預測比客戶訂單數目大 得多;則在會計年度(fiscal year)的後續諸季内, -101 - 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X297公釐) 578071 A7 B7 五、發明説明(98 ) 授權用戶就能夠手動地減少和減慢預測。 (3)當ATP大於該季所需時,就需要使用在IMS中的自 動平準操作,以便執行:用來處理針對該季之超額 ATP的許多步驟。將IMS表加以佈局··首先藉由調 整負ATP(以X表示),然後調整零ATP(以”0”表 示)。然後,將預測手動地調整:從有明顯問題的區 域到可能有潛在問題的區域。針對超額ATP而應用 IMS會影響到銷售預測和幫助確認(validate)先前銷 售計劃。主排程器能夠將駐存商務邏輯(resident business logic)應用在移動預測方面,以適於按訂 單製造(build-to-order)環境。在手動地調整預測之 後,主排程器能夠將IMS表輸出到主排程表,並且 執行一個供應計劃和有關聯操作。 由IMS 1000所形成的IMS表是由裝配件族群組成,該族 群都是基於:在預測總額,客戶和裝運表中的零件表(part list)。根據這些表,ATP數量會被確定,並且用來處理以 上所描述的問題類型。記住源自於主項目表的零件族群也 是挺重要的。 結論 為了圖解說明和描述,已經提出本發明的諸多較佳實施 例之前面描述。並不打算包羅無遺,或者將本發明限於已 披露的精確形式。按照上述教旨,諸多修改和改變都是可 能的。例如,可能依照需要來修改本發明的系統,以滿足 當發展出諸多電腦網路連接(computer networking)方案和 -102- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐)578071 A7 _______ Β7 V. Description of the Invention (96) Interactive Master Scheduler 〇ftn Interactive Master Scheduler (IMS) 10000 is characterized in that it enables users to modify automatically or manually The forecast demand is input to the main production schedule through the interface. IMS 1000 is an application designed for master schedulers in a manufacturing environment. The IMS 1000 allows the use of a master scheduler: dedicated business judgment in matching production forecasts with sales forecasts. The IMS 1000 operates in real time to adjust and produce: production forecasts that best reflect the current business environment. When all required changes have been made, the Master Schedule table is populated, so the supply optimization process begins. IMS 1000 has an automatic leveling program (auto-ieyeier) that adjusts predictions to cover negative available commitments (ATP) if predictions for parts exist. The auto leveling program rolls forward any unused forecast to: remain in the remainder of the month or quarter. Once the autoleveling process is complete, the IMS 1000 will mark all families and parts in order to communicate the status (that is: ATP, no ATP, or negative ATP) to the main scheduler. The master scheduler now has a list of scheduled priority actions for parts; forecasts for these parts need to be checked and adjusted. The main scheduler can use the "drag-and-drop" feature to update the forecast in order to move the forecast from one period to another. When adjustments are made, the IMS will reduce the amount of movement Amount available. The master scheduler can also decide to increase the forecast, which will result in an increase to the current plan. Any adjustments made to the forecast are done in a separate forecast line to save the original forecast. Able to review all changes-100- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (97) Audit trail is saved in monthly archives. IMS 1000 will assist users during the following three basic scheduling scenarios: (1) When the forecast closely reflects the customer order, at this time, the gross forecast is roughly equal to the number of customer orders, so there is a positive number of available committed orders. No An automatic leveling operation is needed to shift the period prediction: from one time bucket of this season to another in order to get positive ATP. Here In the case, the main scheduler does not need to adjust the forecast. Each time the forecast total is adjusted, this scenario is always obtained. (2) When the customer order exceeds the forecast total (ATP), it needs to be executed when the customer order exceeds the forecast. Forecast movements for periods where there will be areas with negative ATP during the entire season. Therefore, the negative predictions obtained will automatically turn forward within the period. This will happen during the first trip with IMS characteristics; after that, it can be manually adjusted Negative net forecasts. For example, two groups can be displayed in a split-screen mode; and users can move the total forecast amount from a cell with a positive ATP to a cell with a negative ATP. One unit. In addition, the user can adjust the ATP between the two units; and, when doing so, a value is prompted. The goal is to support the established sales forecast and maintain between the two units Positive ATP; and when doing so, a value will be prompted. The goal is to support the established sales forecast and maintain a positive ATP every quarter. If the forecast is more than the customer set The number is much larger; then in the subsequent quarters of the fiscal year, -101-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 578071 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (98) Authorized users can manually reduce and slow down predictions. (3) When the ATP is greater than required for the season, an automatic leveling operation in the IMS is required to perform: many steps to handle excess ATP for the season. Lay out the IMS table ... First adjust the negative ATP (indicated by X), and then adjust the zero ATP (indicated by "0"). The forecasts are then adjusted manually: from areas with obvious problems to areas with potential problems. Applying IMS to excess ATP can affect sales forecasts and help validate previous sales plans. The master scheduler is able to apply resident business logic to mobile predictions, suitable for a build-to-order environment. After manually adjusting the forecast, the master scheduler can output the IMS table to the master schedule and perform a supply plan and associated operations. The IMS table formed by the IMS 1000 is composed of assembly groups, which are all based on: part lists in the forecast totals, customers, and shipping tables. Based on these tables, ATP quantities are determined and used to address the types of problems described above. It is also important to keep in mind the family of parts derived from the master item list. Conclusion For the purposes of illustration and description, many preferred embodiments of the invention have been presented in the foregoing description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed. Many modifications and changes are possible in accordance with the above teachings. For example, the system of the present invention may be modified as needed to meet the needs of many computer networking solutions and -102- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

W8071W8071 一種用來配置組件之供應的系統,該系統包括: 1) 一資料庫,它包含與該組件有關的資訊,該資訊用來 描述供應和針對供應之變更;以及 2) —供應規劃程式,因此該供應規劃程式使用同步配置 以產生一供應計劃。 2·如申請專利範圍第1項之系統,其中供應規劃程式使用下 列目標函數: Μ Τ ω^ΣΣ5"χ"十 /=1/=1A system for configuring the supply of components, the system includes: 1) a database containing information related to the component, the information is used to describe the supply and changes to the supply; and 2)-the supply planner, so The supply planner uses synchronous configuration to generate a supply plan. 2. If the system of item 1 of the scope of patent application, the supply planning program uses the following objective function: Μ Τ ω ^ ΣΣ5 " χ " 十 / = 1 / = 1 max ^/7/ V >=1 V ί=1 Jkt λ\γyJi 其中:iics,ύιι,ύΜ,及ύι都是針對客戶服務,收益,盈 利,及庫存量之用戶賦予的加權; acs,Sr,&1^及1都是針對客戶服務,收益,盈利,及 庫存量的定標因數; Xit是二進制變數; ait是給予準時裝運訂單對延後或提早裝運它們的優先選 擇之定標因數; 與需求i有關聯的收益; 心=與需求i有關聯的盈利; c j =項目j的標準成本; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)max ^ / 7 / V > = 1 V ί = 1 Jkt λ \ γyJi where: iics, ιιι, ύΜ, and ιι are weighted by users for customer service, revenue, profit, and inventory; acs, Sr , &Amp; 1 ^ and 1 are calibration factors for customer service, revenue, profit, and inventory; Xit is a binary variable; ait is a calibration factor that gives quasi-fashion orders the priority of delaying or early shipment of them ; Benefits associated with demand i; heart = profit associated with demand i; cj = standard cost of item j; this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ^/8071^ / 8071 裝 578071 六、申請專利範圍 規劃程式,其中該資源需求規劃程式建議變更供應,以便 處理由供應規劃程式所識別的短缺問題。 U·如申請專利範圍第!項之系統,進一步包括··一有限資源 規劃程式,其中該有限資源規劃程式建議最佳使用供應, 以便處理由供應規劃程式所識別的短缺問題。 12·如申請專利範圍第i項之系、统,進一步包括··一客戶允諾 程式,其中該客戶允諾程式會: D確定繼執行供應計劃之後的供應之其餘部份;以及 2)評估一種使用關於其餘部份的新訂單之可行性。 13·如申請專利範圍第丨項之系統,進一步包括:一互動式主 14·如申請專利範圍第!項之系統,其中該資料庫包括:輸入 資料,用戶載明資料,以及輸出資料。 15· —種用來配置組件之供應的方法,該方法包括下列步驟: 1) 形成一資料庫,該資料庫包含與該組件有關的資訊, 該資訊用來描述供應和針對供應之變更; 2) 使用同步配置以產生一供應計劃。 16·如申請專利範圍第15項之方法,其中該資訊使用一種工程 規劃說明來定義組件。 17·如申凊專利範圍第15項之方法,其中用來產生一供應計劃 的步驟包括使用下列目標函數: 矜Pwy修正、年月曰補充Installation 578071 VI. Patent Application Scope Planning Program, in which the resource demand planning program proposes to change the supply in order to deal with the shortage identified by the supply planning program. U · If the scope of patent application is the first! The item system further includes a limited resource planning program, in which the limited resource planning program recommends the optimal use of supply in order to deal with the shortage identified by the supply planning program. 12. If the system and system of item i of the patent application scope further includes a client promise program, where the client promise program will: D determine the rest of the supply following the execution of the supply plan; and 2) evaluate a use Regarding the feasibility of the remaining new orders. 13 · If the system of the scope of patent application 丨, further includes: an interactive main 14. · If the scope of the patent application! Item system, where the database includes: input data, user-specified data, and output data. 15. · A method for configuring the supply of a component, the method includes the following steps: 1) forming a database containing information related to the component, the information is used to describe the supply and changes to the supply; 2 ) Use synchronous configuration to generate a supply plan. 16. The method of claim 15 in which the information uses an engineering planning statement to define the component. 17. The method of claim 15 of the patent scope, wherein the steps used to generate a supply plan include the use of the following objective function: 矜 Pwy correction, year and month supplement 申請專利範圍 max Μ Τ Μ ί τ^sYcs X X 5ltxit + ωΗγ^ x ^=1 i=l /=1 I /=1 ωιΎι M ( T \ M ( 7、Σ 〜ΣΛ, +Σ 〜Σ M ( 7, + Ί M ^ A I Xi / yJ 其中, —ϋ,及仏都是針對客戶服務,收益,盈利, 及庫存量之用戶賦予的加權; 心s ’ aR,心及&1都是針對客戶服務,收益,盈利,及 庫存量的定標因數; Xit是二進制變數; h是給予準時裝運訂單對延後或提早裝運它們的優先選 擇之定標因數,· ^ =與需求i有關聯的收益; =與需求i有關聯的盈利; Cj =項目j的標準成本; Ujkt=消耗存貨量; tjk=發放存貨量; IJt=在時段t結束時之項目j的庫存量; 獨立性需求數目;以及 T=時段數目。 α如申請專利範圍第15項之方法,進一步包括:用來最佳化 使用匹配集合邏輯之供應的步驟。Patent application scope max Μ Τ Μ ί ^^ sYcs XX 5ltxit + ωΗγ ^ x ^ = 1 i = l / = 1 I / = 1 ωιΎι M (T \ M (7, Σ ~ ΣΛ, + Σ ~ Σ M (7 , + Ί M ^ AI Xi / yJ where —ϋ, and 仏 are weights assigned to users for customer service, revenue, profit, and inventory; heart s' aR, heart and & 1 are for customer service , The yield, profit, and inventory calibration factors; Xit is a binary variable; h is the calibration factor that gives quasi-courier shipping orders the priority of delaying or early shipment of them, ^ = revenue associated with demand i; = Profit associated with demand i; Cj = standard cost of item j; Ujkt = consumed inventory; tjk = issued inventory; IJt = inventory of item j at the end of time period t; number of independent requirements; and T = The number of periods. Α The method according to item 15 of the scope of patent application, further comprising the step of optimizing the supply using the matching set logic. 19·如申請專利範圍第15項之方法 嘗少+ 進一步包括··用來載明七 用來產生一供應計劃的步驟中加以考量之一個或更多 目標的步驟。 似X灵夕 20. 如申請專利範圍第15項之方法,推丰H 刀〆女進一步包括以下步驟 υ修改該資料庫以反映第一次變更供應; 2) 為該第-次修改資料庫而製備第_個供應計劃; 3) 修改該資料庫以反映第二次變更供應,· 21. 4) 為該第二次修改資料庫*製備第二個供應計劃; 5) 比較該第一和第二供應計劃的效果。 如申請專職圍第15項之方法,進_步包括以下步驟 1)修改该貧料庫以反映變更供應; 22. 23, 24. 2) 為該修改資料庫而製備一種修改供應計劃; 3) 比較該供應計劃和該修改供應計劃。 如申請專利範圍第15項之方法,進—步包括以下步驟: υ識別在該供應計射所產生之供應㈣缺問題;以及 2)修改該供應以處理該短缺問題。 如申請專利範圍第15項之方法,進—步包括以下步驟: 1) 識別在該供應計劃中所產生之供應的短缺問題;以及 2) 修改該供應計劃以處理該短缺問題。 如申請專利範圍第15項之方法,進一步包括以下步驟· 1) 確定繼執行供應計劃之後的供應之其餘部份^以及 2) 評估一種使用關於其餘部份的新訂單之可行性。 一種可由機器讀取的程式儲存裝置,可實體地實施一種可 由機為執行之諸多指令的程式,以便執行以下步驟· 25. 57807119. The method as claimed in item 15 of the scope of patent application. Trial + further includes a step to specify one or more goals to be considered in the seven steps used to generate a supply plan. Like X Lingxi 20. If the method of applying for the scope of the patent No. 15, Pushfeng H knife female further includes the following steps to modify the database to reflect the first change in supply; 2) For the first time to modify the database; Prepare the _th supply plan; 3) modify the database to reflect the second change in supply, 21. 4) prepare a second supply plan for the second modification database *; 5) compare the first and The effect of the second supply plan. If applying for the full-time method of item 15, the further steps include the following steps: 1) modify the poor material library to reflect the changed supply; 22. 23, 24. 2) prepare a modified supply plan for the modified database; 3) Compare the supply plan with the modified supply plan. If the method of applying for item 15 of the patent scope, the further steps include the following steps: v Identify the supply shortage problem caused by the supply metering; and 2) Modify the supply to deal with the shortage problem. If the method of applying for item 15 of the patent scope, the further steps include the following steps: 1) identifying the shortage of supply in the supply plan; and 2) modifying the supply plan to deal with the shortage. The method of applying for item 15 of the patent scope further includes the following steps: 1) determining the rest of the supply following the execution of the supply plan ^ and 2) evaluating the feasibility of using a new order for the rest. A machine-readable program storage device that can physically implement a program that can be executed by a number of instructions to perform the following steps: 25.578071 A8 B8 C8 D8 、申請專利範圍 1) 形成一資料庫,該資料庫包含與組件之供應有關的資 訊,該資訊用來供應和針對供應之變更; 2) 使用同步配置和匹配集合邏輯,以便產生一種針對該 供應的供應計劃;以及 3) 最佳化該供應計劃。 -6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐)A8 B8 C8 D8, patent application scope 1) forming a database containing information related to the supply of components, which is used for supply and changes to supply; 2) using synchronous configuration and matching set logic to generate A supply plan for the supply; and 3) optimize the supply plan. -6-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 size (210 X 297 mm)
TW091101503A 2001-01-29 2002-01-29 System and method for allocating the supply of critical material components and manufacturing capacity TW578071B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US26432101P 2001-01-29 2001-01-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW578071B true TW578071B (en) 2004-03-01

Family

ID=23005522

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW091101503A TW578071B (en) 2001-01-29 2002-01-29 System and method for allocating the supply of critical material components and manufacturing capacity

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1364327A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2004537772A (en)
AU (1) AU2002241987A1 (en)
TW (1) TW578071B (en)
WO (1) WO2002060235A2 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8249952B2 (en) 2004-03-31 2012-08-21 Jda Software Group, Inc. Incorporating a repair vendor into repair planning for a supply chain
TWI413939B (en) * 2004-03-31 2013-11-01 Jda Software Group Inc Computer-implemented system and method of repair planning in a supply chain and non-transitory computer-readable medium embodied with software for repair planning in a supply chain
TWI419070B (en) * 2011-01-11 2013-12-11 Nat Univ Tsing Hua Relative variable selection system and selection method thereof
TWI571821B (en) * 2014-12-09 2017-02-21 財團法人資訊工業策進會 Combination selecting method and system using the same
CN109284854A (en) * 2017-07-20 2019-01-29 通用电气公司 For the cumulative cost model according to model prediction assets protection cost in danger
CN111489037A (en) * 2020-04-14 2020-08-04 青海绿能数据有限公司 New energy fan spare part storage strategy optimization method based on demand prediction

Families Citing this family (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW573270B (en) * 2002-09-13 2004-01-21 Asiatek Inc Multiple constrains planning and scheduling system
AU2002347755A1 (en) * 2002-11-07 2004-06-03 Singapore Institute Of Manufacturing Technology Method for estimating a lead time of a process
US6983190B2 (en) 2003-10-22 2006-01-03 International Business Machines Corporation Method for optimizing material substitutions within a supply chain
US7672921B1 (en) 2004-02-25 2010-03-02 Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for automatically determining and/or inferring component end of life (EOL)
US20050187744A1 (en) * 2004-02-25 2005-08-25 Morrison James R. Systems and methods for automatically determining and/or inferring component end of life (EOL)
JP2006244470A (en) * 2005-02-01 2006-09-14 Hitachi Ltd Delivery date reply system, delivery date reply method, and delivery date reply program
JP5184128B2 (en) * 2008-02-13 2013-04-17 株式会社日立製作所 Product configuration information creation apparatus, program, and method
JP2012068929A (en) * 2010-09-24 2012-04-05 Hitachi Ltd Supply plan creation device, supply plan creation method and supply plan creation program
JP2012190155A (en) * 2011-03-09 2012-10-04 Toyota Motor Corp Material management apparatus and material management system
US10262297B1 (en) 2013-09-25 2019-04-16 Entercoms, Inc. Part chain management in an aftermarket services industry
JP6379425B2 (en) * 2014-10-24 2018-08-29 三菱重工エンジニアリング株式会社 BOM management system and BOM management method
JP7228387B2 (en) * 2019-01-16 2023-02-24 株式会社日立製作所 Business plan creation support method and business plan creation support device
JP7477397B2 (en) * 2020-08-12 2024-05-01 株式会社日立製作所 SUPPLY AND DEMAND PLANNING DEVICE AND SUPPLY AND DEMAND PLANNING METHOD
CN112396290A (en) * 2020-09-29 2021-02-23 长安大学 MPS/MRP integrated planning method supporting bilateral fuzzy constraint

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5630070A (en) * 1993-08-16 1997-05-13 International Business Machines Corporation Optimization of manufacturing resource planning
US6216109B1 (en) * 1994-10-11 2001-04-10 Peoplesoft, Inc. Iterative repair optimization with particular application to scheduling for integrated capacity and inventory planning
US6049742A (en) * 1997-09-26 2000-04-11 International Business Machines Corporation Projected supply planning matching assets with demand in microelectronics manufacturing
US6272389B1 (en) * 1998-02-13 2001-08-07 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for capacity allocation in an assembly environment
US6157915A (en) * 1998-08-07 2000-12-05 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for collaboratively managing supply chains
US6889197B2 (en) * 2000-01-12 2005-05-03 Isuppli Inc. Supply chain architecture
US20020013721A1 (en) * 2000-05-22 2002-01-31 Alan Dabbiere System, method and apparatus for integrated supply chain management
US20020049625A1 (en) * 2000-09-11 2002-04-25 Srinivas Kilambi Artificial intelligence manufacturing and design

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8249952B2 (en) 2004-03-31 2012-08-21 Jda Software Group, Inc. Incorporating a repair vendor into repair planning for a supply chain
TWI413939B (en) * 2004-03-31 2013-11-01 Jda Software Group Inc Computer-implemented system and method of repair planning in a supply chain and non-transitory computer-readable medium embodied with software for repair planning in a supply chain
TWI419070B (en) * 2011-01-11 2013-12-11 Nat Univ Tsing Hua Relative variable selection system and selection method thereof
TWI571821B (en) * 2014-12-09 2017-02-21 財團法人資訊工業策進會 Combination selecting method and system using the same
CN109284854A (en) * 2017-07-20 2019-01-29 通用电气公司 For the cumulative cost model according to model prediction assets protection cost in danger
CN109284854B (en) * 2017-07-20 2023-06-16 通用电气公司 Cumulative cost model for predicting asset maintenance costs based on distress model
CN111489037A (en) * 2020-04-14 2020-08-04 青海绿能数据有限公司 New energy fan spare part storage strategy optimization method based on demand prediction
CN111489037B (en) * 2020-04-14 2023-04-18 青海绿能数据有限公司 New energy fan spare part storage strategy optimization method based on demand prediction

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1364327A2 (en) 2003-11-26
WO2002060235A3 (en) 2002-12-19
AU2002241987A1 (en) 2002-08-12
WO2002060235A2 (en) 2002-08-08
JP2004537772A (en) 2004-12-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW578071B (en) System and method for allocating the supply of critical material components and manufacturing capacity
US7058587B1 (en) System and method for allocating the supply of critical material components and manufacturing capacity
Tang Perspectives in supply chain risk management
US7941236B2 (en) Methods and systems for employing dynamic risk-based scheduling to optimize and integrate production with a supply chain
US7877281B1 (en) Method and apparatus for component plan analysis under uncertainty
Manzini et al. An integrated approach to the design and management of a supply chain system
US20100125486A1 (en) System and method for determining supply chain performance standards
JP2006503352A (en) Systems and methods for improving planning, scheduling and supply chain management
JP2004517378A (en) Systems and methods for optimizing shipping and transportation
Sahling et al. Strategic supply network planning with vendor selection under consideration of risk and demand uncertainty
CN110414880A (en) Stock control device, inventory management method and storage medium
US20030050870A1 (en) Capacity-driven production planning tools
Käki Forecasting in End-Of-Life Spare Parts Procurement
JP2004021364A (en) Management intention decision support system
Franz Project management with SAP project system
KR20030024538A (en) Production managing system
Xu et al. Integrated optimisation for production capacity, raw material ordering and production planning under time and quantity uncertainties based on two case studies
JP2007323680A (en) Management decision support system
US8494975B2 (en) Method and tool for estimating a ship date profile for a business
Özdemir‐Akyıldırım et al. Allocation of returned products among different recovery options through an opportunity cost–based dynamic approach
JP2008015873A (en) Producible limit planning system and method
US8185420B2 (en) Approximating cycle times within material flow network
Kogan et al. The effect of delivery deviations on the choice of a supplier and the supply-chain equilibrium
Pradhan Demand and supply planning with SAP APO
Algharbi Simulation Based Optimization for Multi-Echelon Pharmaceutical Supply Chain under Customer Service Level Constraint

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees